You are on page 1of 354

Siemens, 2008

All documents may only be used for rendering


services on Siemens Healthcare Products. Any
document in electronic form may be printed
once. Copy and distribution of electronic docu-
ments and hardcopies is prohibited. Offenders
will be liable for damages. All other rights are re-
served.
Print No.:
SiemensWolfManfred
Definition / AS / Flash
PHS
Replacement of Parts
CT
2008
CT00-000.841.03.17.02
Replaces: CT00-000.841.03.16.02
English
Doc. Gen. Date: 08.11
n.a. H CX CS SD CR-CT
Instructions for Replacing or Installing Parts
Siemens, 2008
This document is valid for:
SOMATOM Definition
SOMATOM Definition AS
SOMATOM Definition Flash
08097102 08097144 08098225 08616026 08616034
2 Copyright / Version / Disclaimer
Definition / AS / Flash CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Siemens, 2008
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
Page 2 of 354
1Copyright / Version / Disclaimer
Copyright
Siemens, 2008 refers to the copyright of a Siemens entity such as Siemens Aktienge-
sellschaft - Germany, Siemens Shenzhen Magnetic Resonance Ltd. - China, Siemens
Shanghai Medical Equipment Ltd. - China, Siemens Medical Solutions USA Inc. - USA
and/or Siemens Healthcare Diagnostics Inc. - USA.
Document Version
Siemens reserves the right to change its products and services at any time.
In addition, manuals are subject to change without notice. The hardcopy documents corre-
spond to the version at the time of system delivery and/or printout. Versions to hardcopy
documentation are not automatically distributed. Please contact your local Siemens office
to order current version or refer to our website http://www.healthcare.siemens.com.
Disclaimer
Siemens provides this documentation as is without the assumption of any liability under
any theory of law.
The installation and service of equipment described herein requires superior understand-
ing of our equipment and may only be performed by qualified personnel who are specially
trained for such installation and/or service.
Siemens, 2008 CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Definition / AS / Flash
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
Table of Contents 3
Page 3 of 354

0Table of Contents
1 _______ General _______________________________________________________ 15
Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Safety information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
PHS-specific warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Information for switching off the gantry power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Enabling service power to the patient table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Service movement of PHS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Manual vertical movement of tabletop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
PHS-1B. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
PHS-2 / PHS-3 / PHS-4: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
MPT / MPT-2 (Multi-Purpose Table): . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Manual horizontal movement of tabletop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
2 _______ PHS-2/-3/-4 Covers______________________________________________ 28
Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Tabletop covers (front and rear) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Prerequisites. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Final Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Tabletop lower rear cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Prerequisites. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Final Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Side support (left/right) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Prerequisites. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Final Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Front and rear end covers / switchplate cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Prerequisites. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Final Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Telescopic covers: Releasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Prerequisites. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
4 Table of Contents
Definition / AS / Flash CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Siemens, 2008
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
Page 4 of 354
Preliminary steps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Startup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Final Steps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Telescopic covers: Raising with the help of the belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Preliminary steps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Removal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Startup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Final steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Telescopic covers: Removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Preliminary steps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Startup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Final Steps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Table electronics cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Preliminary steps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Startup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Final Steps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
3 _______ PHS-2/-3/-4 Mechanical __________________________________________ 60
Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Tabletop plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Preliminary steps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Startup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Final Steps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Horizontal drive, tabletop. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Preliminary steps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Startup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Final Steps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Horizontal drive, top support (PHS-3 and PHS-4 only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Preliminary steps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Startup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Siemens, 2008 CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Definition / AS / Flash
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
Table of Contents 5
Page 5 of 354
Final Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Vertical drive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Prerequisites. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Final Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Belt pulley (tabletop) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Prerequisites. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Final steps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Tabletop Drive Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Prerequisites. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Final Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Top Support Drive Belt (PHS-3 and PHS-4 only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Prerequisites. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Final Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Tabletop Position Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Prerequisites. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Final Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Top Support Position Sensor and Band (PHS-3 and PHS-4 only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Prerequisites. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Final Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Vertical position sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Prerequisites. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
6 Table of Contents
Definition / AS / Flash CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Siemens, 2008
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
Page 6 of 354
Final Steps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Vertical Microswitches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Preliminary steps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Startup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Final Steps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
4 _______ PHS-2/PHS-3/PHS-4 Electronics__________________________________ 121
Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Power Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Preliminary steps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Startup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Final Steps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Contactor, relays and diode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Preliminary steps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Startup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Final Steps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Preliminary steps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Startup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Final Steps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Table Master Board (LMAS) > for PHS-3 with SW VA11 ONLY !! . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Preliminary steps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Startup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Final Steps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Table master board (LMAS-2 and LMAS-3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Preliminary steps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Startup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Final Steps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Brake resistor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Preliminary steps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Siemens, 2008 CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Definition / AS / Flash
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
Table of Contents 7
Page 7 of 354
Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Final Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Vertical motor controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Prerequisites. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Final Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Horizontal Motor Controller (Tabletop / Table Support) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Prerequisites. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Final Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Holding solenoid (PHS-4 only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Prerequisites. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
PMM Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Prerequisites. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Final Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
PMM Cable (Top Support) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Prerequisites. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Final Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
PMM cable (vertical lift) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Prerequisites. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Final Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
PHS Cable Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Prerequisites. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
8 Table of Contents
Definition / AS / Flash CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Siemens, 2008
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
Page 8 of 354
Final Steps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
5 _______ PHS-1B Covers________________________________________________ 168
Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Tabletop. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Preliminary Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Removal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Startup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Final Steps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Back Basin, Center Cover, and Front Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Preliminary Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Removal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Startup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Final Steps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Base Cover, Electronics Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Preliminary Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Removal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Startup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Final Steps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
6 _______ PHS-1B Mechanical and Electronic _______________________________ 180
Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Boards within the Electronics Tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Preliminary Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Removal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Startup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Final Steps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Horizontal Drive Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Preliminary Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Removal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Startup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Final Steps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Tabletop Drive Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Preliminary Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Removal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Startup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Final Steps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Siemens, 2008 CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Definition / AS / Flash
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
Table of Contents 9
Page 9 of 354
Tabletop Position Wire Sensor B732 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Prerequisites. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Preliminary Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Final Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Vertical Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Prerequisites. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Preliminary Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Final Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Vertical Position Sensor B711 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Prerequisites. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Preliminary Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Final Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Vertical Microswitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Prerequisites. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Preliminary Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Final Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
7 _______ MPT/MPT-2 covers _____________________________________________ 205
Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Important information for attachment of foot and top covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Tabletop covers (front and rear) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Prerequisites. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Final Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Switchplate cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Prerequisites. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Final Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Side support (left/right) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Prerequisites. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
10 Table of Contents
Definition / AS / Flash CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Siemens, 2008
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
Page 10 of 354
Removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Startup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Final Steps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Front and rear covers (left/right) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Preliminary steps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Startup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Final Steps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Telescopic Covers: Releasing & Raising. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Preliminary steps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Startup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Final Steps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Telescopic Covers: Lowering & Removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Preliminary steps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Startup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Final Steps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
8 _______ MPT/MPT-2 Mechanical _________________________________________ 235
Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Tabletop plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Preliminary steps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Startup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Final Steps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Vertical drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Preliminary steps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Startup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Final Steps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Horizontal drive, tabletop. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Preliminary steps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Startup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Final Steps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Siemens, 2008 CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Definition / AS / Flash
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
Table of Contents 11
Page 11 of 354
Horizontal drive, top support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Prerequisites. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Final Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Belt pulley PHS_MPT (tabletop) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Prerequisites. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Final steps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Tabletop Drive Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Prerequisites. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Final Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Top Support Drive Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Prerequisites. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Final Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Tabletop Position Wire Sensor B732 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Prerequisites. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Final Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Top Support Position Magnetic Sensor and Band . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Prerequisites. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Final Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Vertical position sensor B711. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Prerequisites. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Final Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
12 Table of Contents
Definition / AS / Flash CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Siemens, 2008
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
Page 12 of 354
Vertical Microswitches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Preliminary steps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Startup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Final Steps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
9 _______ MPT/MPT-2 Electronics _________________________________________ 305
Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Power Supplies G701 / G702 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Preliminary steps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Startup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Final Steps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Contactor Relays and Diode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Preliminary steps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Startup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Final Steps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Fuses F701 / F711 / F721 / F731 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Preliminary steps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Startup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Final Steps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Table master board (LMAS-2 and LMAS-3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Preliminary steps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Startup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Final Steps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Brake resistor R719 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
Preliminary steps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
Removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Startup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Final Steps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Vertical motor controller U711. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Preliminary steps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Siemens, 2008 CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Definition / AS / Flash
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
Table of Contents 13
Page 13 of 354
Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Final Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Horizontal motor controller U731 (Tabletop) / U721 (Top Support) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Prerequisites. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Final Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Holding solenoid (MPT-2 only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
Prerequisites. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
PMM Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Prerequisites. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
Startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
Final Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
10 ______ Intervention Module (IVM)_______________________________________ 334
Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
Intervention Panel (IVP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Prerequisites. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
Installation (for wireless operation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Installation (for wired operation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Final Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Wireless Interface Gantry (WIG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
Prerequisites. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
Removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Final Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Rechargeable batteries of IVP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Prerequisites. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Preliminary steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Final Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
11 ______ Changes to Previous Version____________________________________ 352
14 Table of Contents
Definition / AS / Flash CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Siemens, 2008
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
Page 14 of 354
12 ______ Index ________________________________________________________ 353
Siemens, 2008 CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Definition / AS / Flash
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
General 15
Page 15 of 354
1- 1General
Introduction 0
This document describes the replacement of parts procedures for the following patient
table types:
Patient table type Component material number
PHS-4 80 97 144
PHS-3 86 16 034
PHS-2
(= PHS-3 without top support movement)
86 16 026
PHS-1B 106 43 655
MPT
(= Multi-Purpose Table)
80 98 225
MPT-2 80 97 102
16 General
Definition / AS / Flash CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Siemens, 2008
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
Page 16 of 354
Fig. 1: PHS-2 / PHS-3 type patient table
Fig. 2: Multi-purpose table (MPT)
Fig. 3: PHS-4 type patient table
Fig. 4: PHS-1B
Siemens, 2008 CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Definition / AS / Flash
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
General 17
Page 17 of 354
Safety information 1.1
Only qualified and system-trained service staff are allowed to perform CT system installa-
tion, service, maintenance, and quality assurance. Ensure that the most recent version of
the technical documentation is available.
To avoid any risk of injury to persons and/or damage to the system, read and observe the
General Safety Notes (TD00-000.860.01.xx.xx). Please read and observe the Prod-
uct-specific Safety Notes (C2-028.860.01.xx.xx) which include very important
safety-related information as well as information about the handling of screws and nuts,
application of Loctite, and instructions for torque wrenches. You will find the following infor-
mation in the Product-specific Safety Notes.
Safety information related to the method of risk management .
General safety information such as handling of technical documentation, CT system
training request, radiation protection, electrical protection, service tools.
General safety information about working in the gantry with the power off/on .
Use of the patient table as lifting device for gantry part replacement .
Laser products .
Attachment of screws and nuts, application of Loctite, adjustment instructions for the
torque wrench.
PHS-specific warnings 0
WARNING
[ hz_serdoc_F13G01U11M01 ]
Use of the service-enable switch (table) disables collision
protection.
Risk of accident and injury!
Be careful when moving the table.
18 General
Definition / AS / Flash CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Siemens, 2008
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
Page 18 of 354
Information for switching off the gantry power 1.2
1. Switch system to COMP/ON at the control box.
2. Switch OFF the gantry/PHS power using service push-button S1 in the PDC.
Secure the circuit breakers that S1 switched OFF against unintended switch-on
(e.g. lock and tag).
NOTE Read and observe the safety information in the Product-spe-
cific safety notes prior to performing service work on the
patient table. If the patient table power is switched off for ser-
vice work, always secure it against accidental switch-on.

Siemens, 2008 CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Definition / AS / Flash
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
General 19
Page 19 of 354
Enabling service power to the patient table 1.3
Press the blue RESET button (arrow) on the PDC_XGS_Control assembly in the PDC.
Fig. 5: PDC XGS Control Reset pushbutton
20 General
Definition / AS / Flash CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Siemens, 2008
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
Page 20 of 354
PDC-A: F7 is tripped using S1. To apply power to the PHS for service movement, reset
F7 and wait two minutes for the table firmware to initialize.
Fig. 6: F7 in PDC-A
Pos. 1 F7
Relay K7 uses normally closed contacts. When the system is powered OFF in the
normal way, the firmware energizes K7 to remove power. Only when S1 is used
will the relay de-energize to allow power from F7 to flow to the table for testing.
NOTE With software versions VA40 and higher, the PHS controls
run on the UMAS.
Therefore, the UMAS has to be switched on with breaker F11
in addition to F7.

Siemens, 2008 CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Definition / AS / Flash
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
General 21
Page 21 of 354
Service movement of PHS 1.4
Using the service panel
Fig. 7: Example of a PHS 3 service movement panel
Pos. 1 power indicator
Pos. 2 standby indicator
Pos. 3 service on
Pos. 4 service unlock
Ensure that the power indicator (LED) is ON (Item 1) and standby status has
been reached (LED ON at Item 2). This may take 2 minutes after power is
switched on.
Push the service switch (item 3) to activate service mode.
LED will illuminate.
Push and hold the unlock button (Item 4) and at the same time use the move-
ment switches.
Service movement only works if all 4 foot switches are still connected or
the foot switch cables (X741a/b and X751a/b) are plugged into the service
plugs.
22 General
Definition / AS / Flash CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Siemens, 2008
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
Page 22 of 354
Manual vertical movement of tabletop 1.5
In case of a malfunction of the vertical drive, manual vertical movement of the tabletop is
still possible via a mechanical interface at the vertical drive motor.
PHS-1B 0
Crank for manual vertical movement
The emergency crank for vertical movement is attached to the bottom cover in the back.
Fig. 8: Crank for vertical movement
Pos. 1 Crank
Observe the vertical move directions according to the label as shown.
Fig. 9: Access for crank
Fig. 10: Use of crank
Siemens, 2008 CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Definition / AS / Flash
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
General 23
Page 23 of 354
Fig. 11: Turning directions
PHS-2 / PHS-3 / PHS-4: 0
The mechanical interface is located at the axle of the vertical drive.
MPT / MPT-2 (Multi-Purpose Table): 0
The mechanical interface is located at the axle of the vertical drive.
Fig. 12: PHS-2 / PHS-3 / PHS-4: Mechanical interface (vertical drive)
Pos. 1 Mechanical interface (hex nut)
Attach a hex nut to the drive axle (item 1) and move the tabletop mechanically
by turning a wrench in clockwise direction (for raising) or counterclockwise
direction (for lowering).
24 General
Definition / AS / Flash CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Siemens, 2008
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
Page 24 of 354
Fig. 13: MPT / MPT-2: Mechanical interface (vertical drive)
Pos. 1 Mechanical interface (hex bolt)
Attach a hex nut to the drive axle and raise/lower the tabletop mechanically
using a wrench.
Siemens, 2008 CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Definition / AS / Flash
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
General 25
Page 25 of 354
Manual horizontal movement of tabletop 1.6
Manual horizontal movement of the tabletop is possible under the following conditions:
Power to patient table or system has been switched OFF
Stop button has been pushed
One of the release switches is pushed
- Left/right foot switch at electronics cover (PHS-2/PHS-3/PHS-4) or table base
(MPT/MPT-2) or left/right/rear button on top cover (PHS-1B)
- Switch cover at lower rear tabletop (not PHS-1B)
Fig. 14: PHS-2/PHS-3/PHS-4: Safety/release switches (horizontal movement)
Pos. 1 Switch cover bar
Pos. 2 Foot switch (left/ right) at electronics cover
Fig. 15: MPT/MPT-2: Safety/release switches (horizontal movement)
Pos. 1 Switch cover
Pos. 2 Foot switch (left/right)
26 General
Definition / AS / Flash CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Siemens, 2008
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
Page 26 of 354
Fig. 16: PHS-1B: Release button right side Fig. 17: PHS-1B: Release button rear
Siemens, 2008 CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Definition / AS / Flash
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
General 27
Page 27 of 354
Tools 1.7
Normally, a standard tool set is required for performing service as described in this docu-
ment. If special tools are needed, they are described in the relevant replacement descrip-
tion under the Tools item.
NOTE Torque wrenches must be checked for accuracy on a regular
basis.

28 PHS-2/-3/-4 Covers
Definition / AS / Flash CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Siemens, 2008
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
Page 28 of 354
2- 2PHS-2/-3/-4 Covers
Overview 0
This chapter describes the removal and replacement of the PHS covers.
Fig. 18: Table covers, overview
Covers described in this document.
Tabletop covers (front and rear). (Not shown) These are the covers below the table-
top plate covering the support. They are removed to gain access to the drive motors,
tabletop belt, horizontal sensors, and horizontal controllers.
Telescopic covers. (Item 1) These are released from the tabletop support and left at
the lowest position for most service operations, but are removed to gain access to the
vertical drive components.
Tabletop lower rear cover. (Item 2) This cover is underneath the support at the back of
the table. It is removed to gain access to the support belt and for greater access to the
support components.
Front and back end covers. (Item 3) These are at each end of the side covers.
Switchplate cover. (Item 4) These are at each end of the side covers.
Side support (left/right). (Item 5) These are the aluminum covers on each side of the
tabletop. They are normally only removed and replaced if damaged.
Table electronics cover. (Item 6) This is removed to gain access to the components in
the electronics tray.
Siemens, 2008 CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Definition / AS / Flash
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
PHS-2/-3/-4 Covers 29
Page 29 of 354
Tabletop covers (front and rear) 2.1
The following instructions are applicable to:
- Tabletop cover (front)
- Tabletop cover (rear)
Preliminary steps 0
1. Raise the patient table to a height of 125.
2. Switch system to COMP/ON at the control box.
3. Switch OFF the gantry/PHS power using service push-button S1 in the PDC.
Secure the circuit breakers that S1 switched OFF against unintended switch-on
(e.g. lock and tag).
NOTE Read and observe the safety information in the Prod-
uct-specific safety notes prior to performing service work
on the patient table. If the patient table power is switched off
for service work, always secure it against accidental
switch-on.

4. Push table in to the end stop.
5. Remove the switchplate cover (Front and rear end covers / switchplate cover / p. 40).
Prerequisites 0
Safety
WARNING
[ hz_serdoc_F13G01U12M03 ]
Avoid accident and injury or damage to parts.
Risk of accident and injury!
Read and observe the safety information contained in
the General section of this document and/or the
Product specific safety notes.
Time and Manpower
1 person
Estimated total repair time: 15 min.
Tools and auxiliary equipment
Standard service kit
30 PHS-2/-3/-4 Covers
Definition / AS / Flash CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Siemens, 2008
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
Page 30 of 354
Removing 0
1. Remove the rear tabletop cover:
2. Remove the front tabletop cover
Fig. 19: Top cover screws
The rear cover is secured by 6 screws.
Remove all 6 screws and lift the cover away while unplugging the
ground connector.
Fig. 20: Cover plate - old version Fig. 21: Cover plate - new version
Siemens, 2008 CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Definition / AS / Flash
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
PHS-2/-3/-4 Covers 31
Page 31 of 354
- The front cover has another cover plate attached at the front.
- Remove the front-end covers (Front and rear end covers / switchplate cover / p. 40)
and the cover plate securing screws (item 1) from underneath the tabletop plate, and
slide the cover plate out in a forward motion.
NOTE Beginning with delivery in June 2009, the cover plate is fixed
with 5 screws instead of 3.

- Remove the 6 securing screws (similar to back top cover) and slide the top cover out
toward the back while unplugging the ground connector.
Installation 0
1. Replace the covers and ground connectors and install the screws.
Startup 0
Electrical
1. Switch on circuit breakers F2, F3, F5, F6, F7, and F11 in the PDC A and F2 in the PDC
B (not for Definition AS).
First switch the F2, F3, F5, F6 circuit breakers to the 0 position and then to the
1 position.
2. Switch the system to the SYSTEM/ON status at the control box.
Software
n.a
Tune-up
n.a
Tests
1. Perform a test scan
Final Steps 0
1. Clean.
32 PHS-2/-3/-4 Covers
Definition / AS / Flash CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Siemens, 2008
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
Page 32 of 354
Tabletop lower rear cover 2.2
The following instruction is applicable for:
- Lower cover, material number 86 14 690
Prerequisites 0
Safety
WARNING
[ hz_serdoc_F13G01U12M03 ]
Avoid accident and injury or damage to parts.
Risk of accident and injury!
Read and observe the safety information contained in
the General section of this document and/or the
Product specific safety notes.
Time and Manpower
1 person
Estimated total repair time: 15 min.
Tools and auxiliary equipment
Standard service kit
Preliminary steps 0
1. Raise the patient table to height of 125.
2. Switch system to COMP/ON at the control box.
3. Switch OFF the gantry/PHS power using service push-button S1 in the PDC.
Secure the circuit breakers that S1 switched OFF against unintended switch-on
(e.g. lock and tag).
NOTE Read and observe the safety information in the Prod-
uct-specific safety notes prior to performing service work
on the patient table. If the patient table power is switched off
for service work, always secure it against accidental
switch-on.

Siemens, 2008 CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Definition / AS / Flash
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
PHS-2/-3/-4 Covers 33
Page 33 of 354
Removing 0
1. Remove the lower rear cover.
Installation 0
1. Replace cover and install screws.
Startup 0
Electrical
1. Switch on circuit breakers F2, F3, F5, F6, F7, and F11 in the PDC A and F2 in the PDC
B (not for Definition AS).
First switch the F2, F3, F5, F6 circuit breakers to the 0 position and then to the
1 position.
2. Switch the system to the SYSTEM/ON status at the control box.
Fig. 22: Back bottom cover
Pull the support fully out of gantry to gain access to the fasteners.
The back lower cover is secured by 6 screws (Item 1), remove them
and take the cover away.
34 PHS-2/-3/-4 Covers
Definition / AS / Flash CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Siemens, 2008
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
Page 34 of 354
Software
n.a
Tune-up
n.a
Tests
1. Feed table fully in and out to check for rubbing, perform a test scan.
Final Steps 0
1. Clean.
Siemens, 2008 CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Definition / AS / Flash
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
PHS-2/-3/-4 Covers 35
Page 35 of 354
Side support (left/right) 2.3
The following instruction is applicable for:
- Side support (left/right), material number 86 14 542
Prerequisites 0
Safety
WARNING
[ hz_serdoc_F13G01U12M03 ]
Avoid accident and injury or damage to parts.
Risk of accident and injury!
Read and observe the safety information contained in
the General section of this document and/or the
Product specific safety notes.
Time and Manpower
1 person
Estimated total repair time: 45 min.
Tools and auxiliary equipment
Standard service kit
Preliminary steps 0
1. Raise the patient table to height of 125.
2. Switch system to COMP/ON at the control box.
3. Switch OFF the gantry/PHS power using service push-button S1 in the PDC.
Secure the circuit breakers that S1 switched OFF against unintended switch-on
(e.g. lock and tag).
NOTE Read and observe the safety information in the Prod-
uct-specific safety notes prior to performing service work
on the patient table. If the patient table power is switched off
for service work, always secure it against accidental
switch-on.

4. Remove the front and back end covers and back switchplate (Front and rear end cov-
ers / switchplate cover / p. 40)
.
36 PHS-2/-3/-4 Covers
Definition / AS / Flash CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Siemens, 2008
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
Page 36 of 354
Removing 0
1. Measure side support distance from frame.
2. Remove standoff and support.
Fig. 23: Distance measurement
Check the distance from the frame to the side support at the back of
the table. It should be approximately 18 mm (Item 1).
Fig. 24: Standoff
At the front of the cover, remove the standoff (Item 1).
Siemens, 2008 CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Definition / AS / Flash
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
PHS-2/-3/-4 Covers 37
Page 37 of 354
3. Remove the side support.
Fig. 25: Side cover securing screws
From inside the frame, remove the 6 screws (e.g. Item 1) securing the
side cover. The tabletop will have to be moved in and out to gain
access to all screws.
Start with the front screws followed by the back screws, leaving the
center screws until last.
After pushing the tabletop plate fully inward to its limit, hold the side
cover in place with your body while removing the last screw, and then
lift the cover away.
38 PHS-2/-3/-4 Covers
Definition / AS / Flash CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Siemens, 2008
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
Page 38 of 354
Installation 0
1. Transfer the captive nuts.
2. Position the new side cover and install the screws starting at the center. Do not fully
tighten them yet; this allows the cover to be moved slightly to allow the fasteners to
start.
3. Check that the distance from the frame to the cover at the rear is 18 mm, then fully
tighten the fasteners to 6 Nm.
4. Reinstall the Nylon support and spacer at the front of the side cover.
5. Reinstall the front and back-end caps and the switchplate cover.
Startup 0
Electrical
1. Switch on circuit breakers F2, F3, F5, F6, F7, and F11 in the PDC A and F2 in the PDC
B (not for Definition AS).
First switch the F2, F3, F5, F6 circuit breakers to the 0 position and then to the
1 position.
2. Switch the system to the SYSTEM/ON status at the control box.
Fig. 26: Captive nut installed in side cover
The captive nuts slide in a channel of the side cover. A spring keeps
them in position for assembly. In most cases, the old side cover can
be used as a guide for positioning them in the new cover.
Loosely install the fastener to slide out the captive nut and transfer it
to the new side cover.
If there is any question regarding nut positioning, measure from the
back of the table frame to each of the mounting holes, remembering
to subtract 18 mm offset as noted earlier.
Transfer any other option brackets (e.g. carevision) from the old cover
to the new.
Siemens, 2008 CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Definition / AS / Flash
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
PHS-2/-3/-4 Covers 39
Page 39 of 354
Software
n.a
Tune-up
n.a
Tests
1. Perform a test scan
Final Steps 0
1. Clean.
40 PHS-2/-3/-4 Covers
Definition / AS / Flash CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Siemens, 2008
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
Page 40 of 354
Front and rear end covers / switchplate cover 2.4
The following instruction is applicable for:
- Front cover (left), material number 86 14 559
- Front cover (right), material number 86 14 567
- Rear cover (left), material number 86 14 575
- Rear cover (right), material number 86 14 583
- Switchplate cover, material number 86 14 534
Prerequisites 0
Safety
WARNING
[ hz_serdoc_F13G01U12M03 ]
Avoid accident and injury or damage to parts.
Risk of accident and injury!
Read and observe the safety information contained in
the General section of this document and/or the
Product specific safety notes.
Time and Manpower
1 person
Estimated total repair time: 15 min.
Tools and auxiliary equipment
Standard service kit
Preliminary steps 0
1. Raise the patient table to height of 125.
2. Switch system to COMP/ON at the control box.
3. Switch OFF the gantry/PHS power using service push-button S1 in the PDC.
Secure the circuit breakers that S1 switched OFF against unintended switch-on
(e.g. lock and tag).
NOTE Read and observe the safety information in the Prod-
uct-specific safety notes prior to performing service work
on the patient table. If the patient table power is switched off
for service work, always secure it against accidental
switch-on.

Siemens, 2008 CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Definition / AS / Flash
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
PHS-2/-3/-4 Covers 41
Page 41 of 354
Removing 0
1. Remove the front and rear end covers and the switchplate cover.
Installation 0
1. Refit covers, install fasteners, and check that the switchplate does not get stuck in the
operated position.
Startup 0
Electrical
1. Switch on circuit breakers F2, F3, F5, F6, F7, and F11 in the PDC A and F2 in the PDC
B (not for Definition AS).
First switch the F2, F3, F5, F6 circuit breakers to the 0 position and then to the
1 position.
2. Switch the system to the SYSTEM/ON status at the control box.
Software
n.a
Fig. 27: End cover and switchplate cover
The rear is shown, the front is similar.
Each end cover is held by a single fastener (e.g. Item 1). Remove the
plastic plug followed by the fastener, and pull the end cover away
from side cover. At the front, the tabletop may have to be lifted a little
to allow the end cover to pass over the tabletop support wheel.
The switchplate cover is held by 2 fasteners (item 2).
42 PHS-2/-3/-4 Covers
Definition / AS / Flash CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Siemens, 2008
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
Page 42 of 354
Tune-up
n.a
Tests
1. Perform a test scan
Final Steps 0
1. Clean.
Siemens, 2008 CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Definition / AS / Flash
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
PHS-2/-3/-4 Covers 43
Page 43 of 354
Telescopic covers: Releasing 2.5
The following instructions are applicable to:
- Top cover (left), material number 86 14 674
- Top cover (right), material number 86 14 682
- Upper telescopic cover (left/right), material number 86 14 666
- Lower telescopic cover (left/right), material number 86 14 658
- PHS-2: Foot cover (left), material number 86 14 633
- PHS-2: Foot cover (right), material number 86 14 641
- PHS-3 and PHS-4: Foot cover (left), material number 86 14 617
- PHS-3 and PHS-4: Foot cover (right), material number 86 14 625
Prerequisites 0
Safety
WARNING
[ hz_serdoc_F13G01U12M03 ]
Avoid accident and injury or damage to parts.
Risk of accident and injury!
Read and observe the safety information contained in
the General section of this document and/or the
Product specific safety notes.
Time and Manpower
1 person
Estimated total repair time: 15 min.
Tools and auxiliary equipment
Standard service kit
Preliminary steps 0
1. Raise the patient table as it is difficult otherwise to disengage the pins from the slots.
2. Switch system to COMP/ON at the control box.
3. Switch OFF the gantry/PHS power using service push-button S1 in the PDC.
Secure the circuit breakers that S1 switched OFF against unintended switch-on
(e.g. lock and tag).
44 PHS-2/-3/-4 Covers
Definition / AS / Flash CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Siemens, 2008
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
Page 44 of 354
NOTE Read and observe the safety information in the Prod-
uct-specific safety notes prior to performing service work
on the patient table. If the patient table power is switched off
for service work, always secure it against accidental
switch-on.

Removing 0
1. Remove the front fasteners.
Fig. 28: Support cover, front
Remove the 2 securing fasteners at the front of the covers (Item 1);
the cover will be held in place by 2 pins and grommets.
Siemens, 2008 CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Definition / AS / Flash
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
PHS-2/-3/-4 Covers 45
Page 45 of 354
2. Remove the rear fasteners.
3. Release cover.
Fig. 29: Support cover, back
Remove the 4 securing fasteners at the back of the covers (Item 1);
the cover will be held in place by 2 pins and keyways.
Fig. 30: Pin and grommet
Pull down the front to disengage front pins from grommet; support
weight of cover.
46 PHS-2/-3/-4 Covers
Definition / AS / Flash CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Siemens, 2008
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
Page 46 of 354
4. Release the pins from keyways.
Installation 0
1. Raise the table.
2. Position the back pins into the keyway slots and push the cover away from the gantry
until the front pins are over the grommets. Push cover firmly upwards to position the
pins in the grommets.
3. Install the fasteners.
Fig. 31: Top cover pins
Fig. 32: Keyway slots for top cover
Push the cover towards the gantry to disengage the back pins from
the keyway slots.
Lower the cover to floor.
Siemens, 2008 CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Definition / AS / Flash
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
PHS-2/-3/-4 Covers 47
Page 47 of 354
Startup 0
Electrical
1. Switch on circuit breakers F2, F3, F5, F6, F7, and F11 in the PDC A and F2 in the PDC
B (not for Definition AS).
First switch the F2, F3, F5, F6 circuit breakers to the 0 position and then to the
1 position.
2. Switch the system to the SYSTEM/ON status at the control box.
Software
n.a
Tune-up
n.a
Tests
1. Raise and lower the table to check that covers are not rubbing against one another, per-
form a test scan.
Final Steps 0
1. Clean.
48 PHS-2/-3/-4 Covers
Definition / AS / Flash CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Siemens, 2008
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
Page 48 of 354
Telescopic covers: Raising with the help of the belt 2.6
Prerequisites 0
Safety
WARNING
[ hz_serdoc_F13G01U12M03 ]
Avoid accident and injury or damage to parts.
Risk of accident and injury!
Read and observe the safety information contained in
the General section of this document and/or the
Product specific safety notes.
Time and manpower
1 person
Estimated total repair time: 15 min.
Tools and auxiliary equipment
Standard service kit
Belt, material no. 7068521
Preliminary steps 0
1. Move the patient table to the lowest position.
2. Remove the electronics cover as described in (Table electronics cover / p. 57).
Siemens, 2008 CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Definition / AS / Flash
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
PHS-2/-3/-4 Covers 49
Page 49 of 354
Removal 0
1. Remove the screws of the left and right foot cover.
2. Place the belt around the table as shown below.
Carefully lift up the table.
3. Switch the system to COMP/ON at the control box.
4. Switch OFF the gantry/PHS power using service push-button S1 in the PDC.
Secure against unintended switch-on the circuit breakers that S1 switched OFF
(e.g. lock and tag).
NOTE Read and observe the safety guidelines in the Product-spe-
cific safety notes prior to performing service work on the
patient table. If the patient table power is switched off for ser-
vice work, always secure it against accidental switch-on.

Fig. 33: Foot cover, attachment screw Fig. 34: Foot cover, gantry side, attachment
screw
Fig. 35: Lifting cover, side view Fig. 36: Lifting cover, front view
50 PHS-2/-3/-4 Covers
Definition / AS / Flash CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Siemens, 2008
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
Page 50 of 354
Installation 0
1. Lower the table.
2. Align the cover pins over grommets and push the cover until all four pins are in the
proper position.
Fig. 37: Pin and grommet
3. Secure the foot cover with the attachment screws.
4. Install the electronic cover.
Startup 0
Electrical
1. Switch on circuit breakers F2, F3, F5, F6, F7, and F11 in the PDC A and F2 in the PDC
B (not for Definition AS).
First switch the F2, F3, F5, F6 circuit breakers to the 0 position and then to the
1 position.
2. Switch the system to the SYSTEM/ON status at the control box.
Software
n.a.
Tune-up
n.a.
Siemens, 2008 CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Definition / AS / Flash
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
PHS-2/-3/-4 Covers 51
Page 51 of 354
Tests
1. Raise and lower the table to make sure the covers are not rubbing against one another.
Perform a test scan.
Final steps 0
1. Clean.
52 PHS-2/-3/-4 Covers
Definition / AS / Flash CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Siemens, 2008
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
Page 52 of 354
Telescopic covers: Removing 2.7
The following instructions are applicable to:
- Top cover (left), material number 86 14 674
- Top cover (right), material number 86 14 682
- Upper telescopic cover (left/right), material number 86 14 666
- Lower telescopic cover (left/right), material number 86 14 658
- PHS-2: Foot cover (left), material number 86 14 633
- PHS-2: Foot cover (right), material number 86 14 641
- PHS-3 and PHS-4: Foot cover (left), material number 86 14 617
- PHS-3 and PHS-4: Foot cover (right), material number 86 14 625
Prerequisites 0
Safety
WARNING
[ hz_serdoc_F13G01U12M03 ]
Avoid accident and injury or damage to parts.
Risk of accident and injury!
Read and observe the safety information contained in
the General section of this document and/or the
Product specific safety notes.
Time and Manpower
1 person
Estimated total repair time: 30 min.
Tools and auxiliary equipment
Standard service kit
Preliminary steps 0
1. Raise the table to a height of 125.
2. Release the support covers (Telescopic covers: Releasing / p. 43).
3. Switch system to COMP/ON at the control box.
4. Switch OFF the gantry/PHS power using service push-button S1 in the PDC.
Secure the circuit breakers that S1 switched OFF against unintended switch-on
(e.g. lock and tag).
Siemens, 2008 CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Definition / AS / Flash
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
PHS-2/-3/-4 Covers 53
Page 53 of 354
NOTE Read and observe the safety information in the Prod-
uct-specific safety notes prior to performing service work
on the patient table. If the patient table power is switched off
for service work, always secure it against accidental
switch-on.

Removing 0
1. Remove the electronics cover (Table electronics cover / p. 57), unplug X741a and
X741b, then reinstall the cover temporarily to prevent any dropped cover screws from
entering the electronics tray.
2. Remove the top cover rear screw.
Fig. 38: Top cover, extra screw
Remove the single screw holding the back part of the upper covers
together (Item 1).
54 PHS-2/-3/-4 Covers
Definition / AS / Flash CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Siemens, 2008
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
Page 54 of 354
3. Remove the telescopic covers.
4. Remove the bottom cover.
Fig. 39: Segment fasteners
The upper cover, cover 1 and cover 2 segments are all held in place
by 2 fasteners at the front and 2 at the back (e.g. Item 1).
Remove each pair of covers in turn, starting with the top pair.
Then remove the second pair. Mark these segments cover 2 to
identify them during reassembly.
Do the same for the next pair of segments, but mark as cover 1".
Fig. 40: Bottom cover - screws
At the front, remove 1 of the 2 fasteners at the top (Item1) and the
fastener at the bottom (Item 2).
At the back, remove 1 of the 2 fasteners at the top (Item1).
Lift the electronics cover and disconnect plugs X741a and X741b
(lower cover vertical movement foot switches).
With these plugs disconnected, all table movement is inhibited.
Install the service plugs if service movement is required.
Siemens, 2008 CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Definition / AS / Flash
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
PHS-2/-3/-4 Covers 55
Page 55 of 354
5. Lift off the bottom cover.
Installation 0
1. Installation is the reverse of removal. Keep electronics cover in place to prevent
dropped screws from entering the electronics tray.
2. Telescopic covers 1 and 2 should be installed with the larger lip toward the top.
Startup 0
Electrical
1. Switch on circuit breakers F2, F3, F5, F6, F7, and F11 in the PDC A and F2 in the PDC
B (not for Definition AS).
First switch the F2, F3, F5, F6 circuit breakers to the 0 position and then to the
1 position.
2. Switch the system to the SYSTEM/ON status at the control box.
Software
n.a
Tune-up
n.a
Fig. 41: Pin and grommet
The bottom cover is held by 4 pins and grommets, pull the covers
upwards and take away.
56 PHS-2/-3/-4 Covers
Definition / AS / Flash CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Siemens, 2008
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
Page 56 of 354
Tests
1. Raise and lower table to check for rubbing, perform a test scan.
Final Steps 0
1. Clean.
Siemens, 2008 CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Definition / AS / Flash
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
PHS-2/-3/-4 Covers 57
Page 57 of 354
Table electronics cover 2.8
The following instructions are applicable to:
- Electronics cover, material number 86 14 609
Prerequisites 0
Safety
WARNING
[ hz_serdoc_F13G01U12M03 ]
Avoid accident and injury or damage to parts.
Risk of accident and injury!
Read and observe the safety information contained in
the General section of this document and/or the
Product specific safety notes.
Time and Manpower
1 person
Estimated total repair time: 10 min.
Tools and auxiliary equipment
Standard service kit
Preliminary steps 0
1. Raise the patient table to height of 125.
2. Switch system to COMP/ON at the control box.
3. Switch OFF the gantry/PHS power using service push-button S1 in the PDC.
Secure the circuit breakers that S1 switched OFF against unintended switch-on
(e.g. lock and tag).
NOTE Read and observe the safety information in the Prod-
uct-specific safety notes prior to performing service work
on the patient table. If the patient table power is switched off
for service work, always secure it against accidental
switch-on.

58 PHS-2/-3/-4 Covers
Definition / AS / Flash CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Siemens, 2008
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
Page 58 of 354
Removing 0
1. Remove the securing screws.
2. Remove the cover.
Fig. 42: Electronics cover
Remove the 2 securing screws located on the sides of the cover (e.g.
Item 1).
Fig. 43: Pin and grommet
The cover is held by 4 pins and grommets; lift the cover to disengage
pins.
Unplug X751a and X751b before taking the cover away.
With these plugs disconnected, all table movement is inhibited.
Install the service plugs if service movement is required.
Siemens, 2008 CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Definition / AS / Flash
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
PHS-2/-3/-4 Covers 59
Page 59 of 354
Installation 0
1. Install the plugs X751a and X751b and check that all cables are arranged so that they
will not interfere with the cover.
2. Align the cover pins over grommets and push cover until all 4 pins are in the proper
position.
3. Install the 2 securing screws.
Startup 0
Electrical
1. Switch on circuit breakers F2, F3, F5, F6, F7, and F11 in the PDC A and F2 in the PDC
B (not for Definition AS).
First switch the F2, F3, F5, F6 circuit breakers to the 0 position and then to the
1 position.
2. Switch the system to the SYSTEM/ON status at the control box.
Software
n.a
Tune-up
n.a
Tests
1. Check operation of tabletop release foot switches. Perform a test scan.
Final Steps 0
1. Clean.
60 PHS-2/-3/-4 Mechanical
Definition / AS / Flash CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Siemens, 2008
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
Page 60 of 354
3- 3PHS-2/-3/-4 Mechanical
Overview 0
This chapter describes the removal and replacement of the PHS mechanical components.
Fig. 44: PHS mechanical overview
Components described in this document:
Tabletop plate (Item 2).
Horizontal drive motors (Item 1) Both the tabletop plate and top support drive motors
are described.
Vertical drive motor assembly (Item 3).
Horizontal drive belts. Both tabletop plate and top support drive belts are described.
Position sensors (Item 5) Tabletop wire sensor, support magnetic sensor, and verti-
cal position sensor.
Vertical microswitches (Item 6) Upper and lower limit switches and vertical connect
are described. The safety nut switch is not a field replaceable item.
Siemens, 2008 CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Definition / AS / Flash
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
PHS-2/-3/-4 Mechanical 61
Page 61 of 354
Tabletop plate 3.1
The following instructions are applicable to:
- PHS tabletop plate, material number 86 14 302
Prerequisites 0
Safety
WARNING
[ hz_serdoc_F13G01U12M03 ]
Avoid accident and injury or damage to parts.
Risk of accident and injury!
Read and observe the safety information contained in
the General section of this document and/or the
Product specific safety notes.
Time and Manpower
1 person
Estimated total repair time: 1 hr.
Tools and auxiliary equipment
Standard service kit
Loctite 243
Preliminary steps 0
1. Raise the patient table to height of 125.
2. Switch system to COMP/ON at the control box.
3. Switch OFF the gantry/PHS power using service push-button S1 in the PDC.
Secure the circuit breakers that S1 switched OFF against unintended switch-on
(e.g. lock and tag).
NOTE Read and observe the safety information in the Prod-
uct-specific safety notes prior to performing service work
on the patient table. If the patient table power is switched off
for service work, always secure it against accidental
switch-on.

4. Remove the rear tabletop cover (Tabletop covers (front and rear) / p. 29).
5. Remove the lower rear tabletop cover (Tabletop lower rear cover / p. 32).
6. Remove the PMM module (PMM Module / p. 151) and release the cable from the table-
top.
62 PHS-2/-3/-4 Mechanical
Definition / AS / Flash CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Siemens, 2008
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
Page 62 of 354
Removing 0
1. Remove the tabletop plate.
NOTE Due to different revision levels of the tabletop plate and the
table itself, it is possible that either the tabletop plate or the
table has ten fastener holes (instead of eight).
In this case, please leave the first pair of fastener holes on
the gantry side unused and install the tabletop plate with
eight fasteners only (instead of ten).

Installation 0
1. Transfer the PMM box from old tabletop plate to the new one.
T 2. Installation is the reverse of removal. Install bolts applying Loctite 243 and check align-
ment of the tabletop plate with the frame before tightening to 6.8 Nm.
Fig. 45: Undertable view
The tabletop plate is held by 4 pairs (older revisions: five pairs) of fas-
teners which are accessible from below, in the area of the horizontal
drive motors. Five pairs are accessible at a time (see arrows).
Starting with the back pair, remove all eight fasteners (older revisions
ten fasteners), moving the tabletop plate back to gain access to each
pair in turn. <<earlier versions may have a problem with the fastener
near the sensor bracket>>
Lift off the tabletop plate.
Siemens, 2008 CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Definition / AS / Flash
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
PHS-2/-3/-4 Mechanical 63
Page 63 of 354
3. Reinstall the PMM Module and the cable.
4. Reinstall all covers.
Startup 0
Electrical
1. Switch on circuit breakers F2, F3, F5, F6, F7, and F11 in the PDC A and F2 in the PDC
B (not for Definition AS).
First switch the F2, F3, F5, F6 circuit breakers to the 0 position and then to the
1 position.
2. Switch the system to the SYSTEM/ON status at the control box.
Software
n.a
Tune-up
n.a
Tests
1. Perform a test scan
Final Steps 0
1. Clean.
64 PHS-2/-3/-4 Mechanical
Definition / AS / Flash CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Siemens, 2008
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
Page 64 of 354
Horizontal drive, tabletop 3.2
The following instructions are applicable to:
- PHS horizontal drive motor, material numbers 86 14 344 (PHS-2 and PHS-3) and 86
18 386 (PHS-4)
NOTE The horizontal drive is delivered as a set with the drive pulley
and the jaw spanner. We recommend replacing the drive pul-
ley together with the motor.

Prerequisites 0
Safety
WARNING
[ hz_serdoc_F13G01U12M03 ]
Avoid accident and injury or damage to parts.
Risk of accident and injury!
Read and observe the safety information contained in
the General section of this document and/or the
Product specific safety notes.
Time and Manpower
1 person
Estimated total repair time: 1 hr.
Tools and auxiliary equipment
Standard service kit
Preliminary steps 0
1. Raise table to height of 125.
2. Switch system to COMP/ON at the control box.
3. Switch OFF the gantry/PHS power using service push-button S1 in the PDC.
Secure the circuit breakers that S1 switched OFF against unintended switch-on
(e.g. lock and tag).
Siemens, 2008 CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Definition / AS / Flash
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
PHS-2/-3/-4 Mechanical 65
Page 65 of 354
NOTE Read and observe the safety information in the Prod-
uct-specific safety notes prior to performing service work
on the patient table. If the patient table power is switched off
for service work, always secure it against accidental
switch-on.

4. Release the telescopic covers (Telescopic covers: Releasing / p. 43).
5. Remove the lower rear tabletop cover (Tabletop lower rear cover / p. 32).
6. Feed in the table and remove the tabletop covers (Tabletop covers (front and
rear) / p. 29).
66 PHS-2/-3/-4 Mechanical
Definition / AS / Flash CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Siemens, 2008
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
Page 66 of 354
Removing 0
1. Release cables.
Siemens, 2008 CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Definition / AS / Flash
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
PHS-2/-3/-4 Mechanical 67
Page 67 of 354
68 PHS-2/-3/-4 Mechanical
Definition / AS / Flash CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Siemens, 2008
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
Page 68 of 354
For PHS-2 and PHS-3 only:
Fig. 46: View of back
At the back of the table, remove plug X3 of the tabletop motor con-
troller (Item1) by pulling the connector. Pull connector X2 from the
other end of the controller and remove the 2 wires to the drive motor
from pins 1 and 3.
Disconnect plug X731/X732 (item 3).
Cut all cable ties and remove cable clamps to release all cables to the
drive motor.
For PHS-4 only:
Fig. 47: PHS -4: View from below
Disconnect the cables on the horizontal drive
Siemens, 2008 CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Definition / AS / Flash
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
PHS-2/-3/-4 Mechanical 69
Page 69 of 354
2. Remove back tabletop belt adjuster.
3. Form loop in belt.
Fig. 48: Tabletop belt adjuster
At the back of the table, release the adjuster screw (item 1) and
remove the 2 fasteners holding the adjuster (item 2); lift out the
adjuster.
Fig. 49: Loop in drive belt
From underneath, pull the drive belt down to form a loop that allows
access to the drive pulley.
70 PHS-2/-3/-4 Mechanical
Definition / AS / Flash CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Siemens, 2008
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
Page 70 of 354
4. Remove the drive pulley.
Fig. 50: Removing and installing the drive pulley
Open the Allen screw and pull the drive pulley off the motor shaft.
If the pulley cannot be removed by hand, a small screwdriver can be
used to assist.
Pull out the loop in the drive belt.
Siemens, 2008 CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Definition / AS / Flash
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
PHS-2/-3/-4 Mechanical 71
Page 71 of 354
5. Remove the drive.
Installation 0
1. Transfer connector X3 from the old drive to the new one.
T 2. Install the motor and secure with 4 screws/nuts.
For PHS-2 and PHS-3: Tighten to 3 Nm.
For PHS-4: Tighten to 5 Nm.
3. Install all connectors, including pins 1 and 2 of X2.
Fig. 51: Drive motor securing screws - PHS-2, PHS-3
Fig. 52: Drive motor (table top) securing screws - PHS-4
Remove the 4 nuts (Item 1) holding drive motor to frame, lift away the
drive motor.
72 PHS-2/-3/-4 Mechanical
Definition / AS / Flash CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Siemens, 2008
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
Page 72 of 354
4. Push the drive pulley onto the motor shaft together with the jaw spanner.
NOTE The jaw spanner will be used
1. as a spacer between the drive pulley and the motor box
2. as opposite support

T 5. Fasten the drive pulley with the following torque:
PHS-2 and PHS-3: 35 Nm
PHS -4: 65 Nm
(Fig. 50 / p. 70).
6. Pull out the drive belt loop and reinstall the back adjuster, check that the drive belt is
located properly in the drive pulley.
7. Adjust the drive belt tension to 52 +2 Hz using the belt tension meter. The procedure is
described in (Installation / p. 95).
8. Install wires into X2 pins 1,3, then plug X2 and X3 into the controller and install plug
X731/X732. Install clamps and cable ties.
9. Reinstall all covers.
Startup 0
Electrical
1. Switch on circuit breakers F2, F3, F5, F6, F7, and F11 in the PDC A and F2 in the PDC
B (not for Definition AS).
First switch the F2, F3, F5, F6 circuit breakers to the 0 position and then to the
1 position.
Fig. 53: Installing the drive pulley
Pos. 1 Drive pulley for tabletop
Pos. 2 Jaw spanner
Pos. 3 Horizontal motor for top support
Siemens, 2008 CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Definition / AS / Flash
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
PHS-2/-3/-4 Mechanical 73
Page 73 of 354
2. Switch the system to the SYSTEM/ON status at the control box.
Software
n.a
Tune-up
1. Perform PHS calibration for tabletop.
Tests
1. Perform a test scan
Final Steps 0
1. Clean.
74 PHS-2/-3/-4 Mechanical
Definition / AS / Flash CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Siemens, 2008
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
Page 74 of 354
Horizontal drive, top support (PHS-3 and PHS-4 only) 3.3
The following instructions are applicable to:
- PHS horizontal drive motor, material number 86 18 394
NOTE The horizontal drive is delivered as a set with the drive pulley
and the jaw spanner. We recommend replacing the drive pul-
ley together with the motor.

Prerequisites 0
Safety
WARNING
[ hz_serdoc_F13G01U12M03 ]
Avoid accident and injury or damage to parts.
Risk of accident and injury!
Read and observe the safety information contained in
the General section of this document and/or the
Product specific safety notes.
Time and Manpower
1 person
Estimated total repair time: 45 min.
Tools and auxiliary equipment
Standard service kit
Preliminary steps 0
1. Raise table to height of 125.
2. Switch system to COMP/ON at the control box.
3. Switch OFF the gantry/PHS power using service push-button S1 in the PDC.
Secure the circuit breakers that S1 switched OFF against unintended switch-on
(e.g. lock and tag).
NOTE Read and observe the safety information in the Prod-
uct-specific safety notes prior to performing service work
on the patient table. If the patient table power is switched off
for service work, always secure it against accidental
switch-on.

Siemens, 2008 CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Definition / AS / Flash
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
PHS-2/-3/-4 Mechanical 75
Page 75 of 354
4. Release the telescopic covers (Telescopic covers: Releasing / p. 43).
5. Remove the lower rear tabletop cover (Tabletop lower rear cover / p. 32).
6. Feed in the table and remove the tabletop covers (Tabletop covers (front and
rear) / p. 29).
Removing 0
1. Release cables.
Fig. 54: View of back
At the back of the table, remove plug X3 of the support motor control-
ler (Item2) by pulling the connector. Pull connector X2 from the other
end of the controller and remove pins 1 and 3.
Disconnect plug X731/X732 (item 4).
Cut all cable ties and remove cable clamps to release cables to the
drive motor.
76 PHS-2/-3/-4 Mechanical
Definition / AS / Flash CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Siemens, 2008
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
Page 76 of 354
2. Remove the adjuster.
3. Remove the drive pulley.
Fig. 55: Support belt adjuster
Release locknut (item 1), loosen clamping bolt (Item 2), and unscrew
the adjuster to release tension on the belt.
Continue unscrewing the adjuster until the bracket can be removed
from the frame.
The procedure to remove the drive pulley for the top support is iden-
tical to the procedure for the drive pulley of the tabletop described in
(Removing / p. 66)
Fig. 56: Drive pulley of top support
Pos. 1 Drive pulley for top support
Pos. 2 Mounting screw
Pos. 3 Drive pulley for tabletop
Siemens, 2008 CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Definition / AS / Flash
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
PHS-2/-3/-4 Mechanical 77
Page 77 of 354
4. Remove the drive motor.
Installation 0
1. Transfer connector X3 from the old drive to the new one.
T 2. Install motor and secure with 4 screws. Tighten to 3 Nm.
3. Install pulley on motor shaft. The procedure is the same as for the drive pulley of the
tabletop described in (Installation / p. 71)
4. Reinstall and adjust the support drive belt to 70 +2 Hz using the belt tension meter. The
procedure is described in (Installation / p. 100).
5. Install wires into X2 pins 1 and 3, then plug X2 and X3 into controller and install plug
X731/X732. Install clamps and cable ties.
Startup 0
Electrical
1. Switch on circuit breakers F2, F3, F5, F6, F7, and F11 in the PDC A and F2 in the PDC
B (not for Definition AS).
First switch the F2, F3, F5, F6 circuit breakers to the 0 position and then to the
1 position.
2. Switch the system to the SYSTEM/ON status at the control box.
Software
n.a
Fig. 57: Drive motor securing screws
Remove the 4 fasteners and take the drive motor away.
78 PHS-2/-3/-4 Mechanical
Definition / AS / Flash CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Siemens, 2008
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
Page 78 of 354
Tune-up
1. Perform the PHS calibration for top support.
Tests
1. Perform a test scan
Final Steps 0
1. Clean.
Siemens, 2008 CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Definition / AS / Flash
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
PHS-2/-3/-4 Mechanical 79
Page 79 of 354
Vertical drive 3.4
The following instructions are applicable to:
- PHS vertical drive, material number 86 14 427 (valid for software <VA20)
- PHS vertical drive, material number 86 14 294 (valid for software VA20 and
onwards)
Prerequisites 0
Safety
WARNING
[ hz_serdoc_F13G01U12M03 ]
Avoid accident and injury or damage to parts.
Risk of accident and injury!
Read and observe the safety information contained in
the General section of this document and/or the
Product specific safety notes.
Time and Manpower
1 person
Estimated total repair time: 1 1/2 hours.
Tools and auxiliary equipment
Standard service kit
Loctite 243
12 mm + 14mm hex key socket
Mallet

Fig. 58: A "mallet" is a type of hammer with a head made of softer material.
80 PHS-2/-3/-4 Mechanical
Definition / AS / Flash CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Siemens, 2008
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
Page 80 of 354
Preliminary steps 0
1. Raise table to height of 125.
2. Switch off the system (Click <SYSTEM> and select <Shutdown> in the user main
menu; this switches off the system automatically after shut down).
3. Switch off the gantry power using service push-button S1 in PDC A. Secure against
unintended switch-on.
4. Release the telescopic covers (Telescopic covers: Releasing / p. 43).
5. Remove the telescopic covers (Telescopic covers: Removing / p. 52).
Removing 0
1. Remove the cables:-
- U711_X7 at the vertical motor controller.
- U711_X3 at the vertical motor controller.
- U711_X1, wires U,V,W, and PE at the vertical motor controller.
- M700_X711 at electronics tray.
- Cut all cable ties to release motor cables.
2. Disconnect microswitches.
Fig. 59: Disconnect and safety nut switches
Remove the bracket and connect microswitch (S718) (Item 3) and
lay the switch and bracket aside.
Remove connections S717SC, S717C at the safety nut microswitch
(S717) (Item 2) mounted on the drive motor spindle.
Siemens, 2008 CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Definition / AS / Flash
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
PHS-2/-3/-4 Mechanical 81
Page 81 of 354
3. Install the safety bolts.
4. Lower the table onto the safety bolts.
Fig. 60: Vertical safety bolts
Remove safety bolts from the storage position (Item 1) and install into
vertical lock position (Item 2) using the 14mm hex key.
Fig. 61: Vertical drive motor securing screws
Using a 6 mm hex key, lower the table by turning the manual lift screw
( Item 1 ) counterclockwise until the weight of the table is taken by the
safety bolts. Continue until the bottom of the drive rises 1-2 mm off
the base plate (Item 2).
Remove the 3 securing bolts (Item 3). Note that the heads are
approximately 8 mm high to allow some freedom of vertical move-
ment for the drive.
82 PHS-2/-3/-4 Mechanical
Definition / AS / Flash CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Siemens, 2008
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
Page 82 of 354
5. Remove the cross brace locating screws.
6. Remove the cross brace.
Fig. 62: Crossbrace screws
Using a 4 mm hex key, remove the two locking screws (Item 1).
Using a 12 mm hex key, remove the two cross brace locating screws
(e.g. Item 2).
Fig. 63: Removing vertical drive
Pull on the cross brace to remove it from the scissors and lift out the
drive. If there is any difficulty, use a mallet to assist with removing the
cross brace.
Siemens, 2008 CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Definition / AS / Flash
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
PHS-2/-3/-4 Mechanical 83
Page 83 of 354
7. Remove the shaft pin.
Installation 0
1. Install the cross brace on to the new drive, insert the pin, and tighten the 2 locking
screws. Rotate the cross brace to obtain the approximate height for reinstallation. Fine
adjustments can be made with the manual lift screw.
Attention:
Dont move the spindle higher than the position for reinstallation. Otherwise, the
ball bearings from the spindle nut will fall out.
2. Place the drive in position and push the cross brace into place between the scissors;
again, use a mallet if necessary.
T 3. Install the cross brace locating screws, tighten them to 130 Nm, and install the 2 locking
screws with torque of 18.6 Nm.
4. Use the manual lift screw to lower the drive motor (clockwise) until it almost touches the
base plate and install the three locating screws applying Loctite 243, leaving 8 mm
between the head and the drive motor flange.
5. Continue to turn clockwise to raise the table until the safety bolts can be removed. Rein-
stall them in the storage positions.
6. Reinstall and adjust connect microswitch S718.
7. Reinstall all plugs and wires to original configuration, using cable ties as necessary.
8. Replace all covers.
Fig. 64: Shaft locking pin
Remove the 2 locking screws (item 1) and withdraw the pin (Item 2).
Lift off the cross brace.
84 PHS-2/-3/-4 Mechanical
Definition / AS / Flash CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Siemens, 2008
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
Page 84 of 354
Startup 0
Electrical
1. Switch on circuit breakers F2, F3, F5, F6, F7, and F11 in the PDC A and F2 in the PDC
B (not for Definition AS).
First switch the F2, F3, F5, F6 circuit breakers to the 0 position and then to the
1 position.
2. Switch the system to the SYSTEM/ON status at the control box.
Software
n.a
Tune-up
1. Perform the PHS calibration for vertical positioning.
Tests
1. Perform a test scan
Final Steps 0
1. Clean.
Siemens, 2008 CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Definition / AS / Flash
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
PHS-2/-3/-4 Mechanical 85
Page 85 of 354
Belt pulley (tabletop) 3.5
The following instructions are applicable to:
The table below shows the usage of the two versions:
NOTE Replace the belt pulley with the same version that was
installed before.
The Belt pulley PHS_MPT does not fit into patient tables
delivered with Belt pulley PHS.
This instruction describes the example of replacement of the
Belt pulley PHS. The mechanical work is identical when
replacing the Belt pulley PHS_MPT.

Prerequisites 0
Time and manpower
1 person
Estimated total repair time: 1.5 hours
Fig. 65: Belt pulley PHS (without drive shaft
support), part no. 8615853
Fig. 66: Belt pulley PHS_MPT (with drive
shaft support), part no. 8615861
Belt pulley PHS,
part no. 8615853
Belt pulley PHS_MPT,
part no. 8615861
Patient table version Serial no. range:
PHS-2, product no. 8616026 up to serial no. 1169 from serial no. 1170 onward
PHS-3, product no. 8616034 up to serial no. 1601 from serial no. 1602 onward
PHS-4, product no. 8097144 n.a. from serial no. 1001 onward
86 PHS-2/-3/-4 Mechanical
Definition / AS / Flash CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Siemens, 2008
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
Page 86 of 354
Tools and auxiliary equipment
Standard service tools.
Belt tension meter, part no. 8614203 or 7355642.
Preliminary steps 0
1. Raise the table to a height of 125.
2. Switch the system to COMP/ON on the control box.
3. Switch OFF the gantry/PHS power using the service push-button S1 in the PDC.
Secure the circuit breakers that S1 switched off against unintended switch-on
(e.g. lock and tag).
NOTE Read and observe the safety information in the Prod-
uct-specific safety notes prior to performing service work
on the patient table. If the patient table power is switched off
for service work, always secure it against accidental
switch-on.

4. Remove the switchplate cover (Removing / p. 41).
5. Feed in the table and remove the tabletop covers (Tabletop covers (front and
rear) / p. 29).
Fig. 67: Right front cover
Remove the right front cover (1/Fig. 67 / p. 86).
Removal 0
1. Move the tabletop approximately 50 cm (20 inches) into the gantry.
NOTE Do not slide the tabletop when the belt pulleys are removed.

Siemens, 2008 CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Definition / AS / Flash
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
PHS-2/-3/-4 Mechanical 87
Page 87 of 354
2. Remove the rear belt pulley:
3. Remove the front belt pulley:
Fig. 68: Tabletop belt pulley (rear)
1. Release the belt tension adjustment screw (1).
2. Remove the two fastening screws (2).
3. Lift the belt pulley (3) out of the belt.
Fig. 69: Tabletop belt pulley (front)
1. Remove the belt (1).
2. Release the belt tension adjustment screw (2).
3. Remove the two fastening screws (3).
4. Remove the belt pulley.
88 PHS-2/-3/-4 Mechanical
Definition / AS / Flash CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Siemens, 2008
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
Page 88 of 354
Installation 0
1. Prepare the new belt pulleys:
Fig. 70: Preparing the new belt pulley assembly
The position of the alignment screw depends on the installation location
of the belt pulley:
Front belt pulley: Insert the alignment screw into the lower thread
(1).
Rear belt pulley: Insert the alignment screw into the upper thread (2).
The alignment screw should protrude approx. 0.7 to 1.0 mm at the oppo-
site side.
Siemens, 2008 CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Definition / AS / Flash
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
PHS-2/-3/-4 Mechanical 89
Page 89 of 354
2. Install the front belt pulley.
3. Install the rear belt pulley.
Fig. 71: Installing the belt pulley (front)
1. Place the new belt pulley.
2. Insert the fastening screws:
- Insert the longer screw (1) closer to the rear side.
- Insert the shorter screw (2) closer to the front side.
3. Position the belt pulley:
- Insert the adjustment screw (3)
- Push the belt pulley to the PHS center
- Adjust a distance of 4 mm between the leading edge of the belt pul-
ley and the front of the support frame (4).
4. Install the fastening screws (1, 2) but do not fully tighten them yet.
5. Put the belt (5) onto the front pulley.
Fig. 72: Installing the belt pulley (rear)
Insert the new pulley into the belt (1).
Install the fastening screws (2) but do not fully tighten them yet.
Turn the adjustment screw (3) until the belt is pre-loaded.
90 PHS-2/-3/-4 Mechanical
Definition / AS / Flash CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Siemens, 2008
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
Page 90 of 354
Adjustment 0
1. Adjust the belt tension:
- Push the tabletop towards the gantry until a distance of 600 mm between the rear
pulley and the belt clamp is achieved.
- Place the sensor of the belt tension meter at the center of the trim length over the flat
size of the belt (300 mm) (1/Fig. 74 / p. 90).
The distance between sensor and belt should be about 5 to 20 mm.
- Start belt vibration by hitting it with the head of a screwdriver.
- The resonance frequency must be 52
+ 2
Hz for correct belt tension.
- Adjust the required frequency by turning the setscrew (2/Fig. 74 / p. 90).
Fig. 73: Belt tabletop - distance 600 mm
Fig. 74: Belt tension measurement (with new
meter)
Fig. 75: Belt tension measurement (with old
meter)
Siemens, 2008 CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Definition / AS / Flash
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
PHS-2/-3/-4 Mechanical 91
Page 91 of 354
2. Adjust the axial belt position:
- Manually move the tabletop in and out and check that the belt is centered properly on
the front and rear pulley (1).
- Turn the alignment screw (2) to adjust the correct (centered) belt position (1).
NOTE After axial adjustment the belt should not constantly touch
the pulley side.
When pushing or pulling the tabletop, a slight shift of the belt
to the left or right side is acceptable.

3. Tighten the fastening screws of both belt pulleys with 11 Nm.
Startup 0
Electrical
1. Switch on circuit breakers F2, F3, F5, F6, F7, and F11 in the PDC A and F2 in the PDC
B (not for Definition AS).
First switch the F2, F3, F5, F6 circuit breakers to the 0 position and then to the
1 position.
2. Switch the system to SYSTEM/ON status on the control box.
Software
n.a.
Tune-up
n.a.
Fig. 76: Centered positioned belt Fig. 77: Adjusting the overturning
92 PHS-2/-3/-4 Mechanical
Definition / AS / Flash CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Siemens, 2008
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
Page 92 of 354
Tests
1. Move the tabletop (in and out) with gantry panel buttons.
2. Perform test scans (Topogram and Spiral).
Final steps 0
1. Install all PHS covers.
2. Clean the PHS.
Siemens, 2008 CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Definition / AS / Flash
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
PHS-2/-3/-4 Mechanical 93
Page 93 of 354
Tabletop Drive Belt 3.6
The following instructions are applicable to:
- PHS tabletop drive belt, part no 86 14 351
Prerequisites 0
Safety
WARNING
[ hz_serdoc_F13G01U12M03 ]
Avoid accident and injury or damage to parts.
Risk of accident and injury!
Read and observe the safety information contained in
the General section of this document and/or the
Product specific safety notes.
Time and Manpower
1 person
Estimated total repair time: 45 min.
Tools and auxiliary equipment
Standard service kit
Belt tension meter, for material number see the SPC.
Preliminary steps 0
1. Raise table to height of 125.
2. Switch system to COMP/ON at the control box.
3. Switch OFF the gantry/PHS power using service push-button S1 in the PDC.
Secure the circuit breakers that S1 switched OFF against unintended switch-on
(e.g. lock and tag).
NOTE Read and observe the safety information in the Prod-
uct-specific safety notes prior to performing service work
on the patient table. If the patient table power is switched off
for service work, always secure it against accidental
switch-on.

4. Release the telescopic covers (Telescopic covers: Releasing / p. 43).
5. Remove the lower rear tabletop cover (Tabletop lower rear cover / p. 32).
6. Feed in the table and remove the tabletop covers (Tabletop covers (front and
rear) / p. 29).
94 PHS-2/-3/-4 Mechanical
Definition / AS / Flash CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Siemens, 2008
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
Page 94 of 354
Removing 0
1. Move tabletop plate to approximately 1.5 meters into the gantry so that the belt secur-
ing point is accessible from underneath.
2. Release the rear adjuster.
3. Form a loop in the belt.
Fig. 78: Tabletop belt adjuster
Unscrew adjustment screw (1).
Remove the 2 holding screws (2) and lift the adjuster away.
Fig. 79: Loop in drive belt
From underneath, pull the drive belt down to the form as shown in the
figure above.
Siemens, 2008 CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Definition / AS / Flash
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
PHS-2/-3/-4 Mechanical 95
Page 95 of 354
4. Remove the belt.
Installation 0
1. Push table fully into gantry and feed the end of the belt through the front adjuster.
T 2. Ensure that both ends of the belt are fully inserted into securing clamp and install the
two screws and tighten to 6 Nm.
3. Create a loop in the belt as shown above.
4. Reinstall the rear belt tensioner. There is also a front belt tensioner which does not nor-
mally need to be adjusted; however, if difficulties are experienced it can also be
released.
Remove the front right end cap (Front and rear end covers / switchplate cover / p. 40) to
gain access.
5. Check belt tension.
Fig. 80: Tabletop belt clamp
Pull out the loop in the drive belt.
Remove the 2 holding screws on the belt clamp (item 1).
Withdraw the belt.
96 PHS-2/-3/-4 Mechanical
Definition / AS / Flash CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Siemens, 2008
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
Page 96 of 354
- Procedure using the belt tension meter
- Push the tabletop plate towards the gantry until you achieve a distance of 600 mm
between the rear pulley and the belt clamp.
- Place the sensor at the center of the trim length over the flat size of the belt (300
mm). The distance between sensor and belt should be about 5 to 20 mm.
To learn how to use the tension meter, see the operating instructions delivered with
the meter.
- Start belt vibration by hitting it with the head of a screwdriver.
- Perform the measurement.
- The resonance frequency must be 58 +2 Hz for correct belt tension.
NOTE The value 58 +2 Hz is only valid for a new belt. For other
cases, e.g. after replacement of the horizontal motor, the ten-
sion has to be adjusted to 52 +2 Hz.

Fig. 81: Belt tabletop - distance 600 mm
Fig. 82: Measuring with the belt tension meter
Siemens, 2008 CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Definition / AS / Flash
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
PHS-2/-3/-4 Mechanical 97
Page 97 of 354
6. Adjust the belt tension.
7. Install all covers.
Startup 0
Electrical
1. Switch on circuit breakers F2, F3, F5, F6, F7, and F11 in the PDC A and F2 in the PDC
B (not for Definition AS).
First switch the F2, F3, F5, F6 circuit breakers to the 0 position and then to the
1 position.
2. Switch the system to the SYSTEM/ON status at the control box.
Software
n.a
Tune-up
n.a.
Fig. 83: Tabletop belt adjuster
To adjust the belt tension use the adjustment screw (Item 1).
Tighten clamping screws (Item 2) to 11 Nm.
98 PHS-2/-3/-4 Mechanical
Definition / AS / Flash CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Siemens, 2008
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
Page 98 of 354
Tests
1. Perform a test scan
Final Steps 0
1. Clean.
Siemens, 2008 CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Definition / AS / Flash
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
PHS-2/-3/-4 Mechanical 99
Page 99 of 354
Top Support Drive Belt (PHS-3 and PHS-4 only) 3.7
The following instructions are applicable to:
- PHS top support drive belt, material number 86 14 369
Prerequisites 0
Safety
WARNING
[ hz_serdoc_F13G01U12M03 ]
Avoid accident and injury or damage to parts.
Risk of accident and injury!
Read and observe the safety information contained in
the General section of this document and/or the
Product specific safety notes.
Time and Manpower
1 person
Estimated total repair time: 30 min.
Tools and auxiliary equipment
Standard service kit
Belt tension meter, for material number see the SPC.
Preliminary steps 0
1. Raise table to height of 125.
2. Switch system to COMP/ON at the control box.
3. Switch OFF the gantry/PHS power using service push-button S1 in the PDC.
Secure the circuit breakers that S1 switched OFF against unintended switch-on
(e.g. lock and tag).
NOTE Read and observe the safety information in the Prod-
uct-specific safety notes prior to performing service work
on the patient table. If the patient table power is switched off
for service work, always secure it against accidental
switch-on.

4. Release the telescopic covers (Telescopic covers: Releasing / p. 43).
5. Remove the lower rear tabletop cover (Tabletop lower rear cover / p. 32).
6. Push table in approx. 1.5 meters.
100 PHS-2/-3/-4 Mechanical
Definition / AS / Flash CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Siemens, 2008
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
Page 100 of 354
Removing 0
1. Remove the adjuster.
2. Remove the belt.
Installation 0
T 1. Feed the new belt through the adjuster bracket and reinstall clamp. Tighten screws to 6
Nm.
2. Route belt over motor pulley and reinstall the belt tensioner.
Fig. 84: Support belt adjuster
Release lock nut (item 1), remove clamping bolt (Item 2), and
unscrew adjuster (Item 3) to release belt tension.
Continue unscrewing adjuster until the adjuster bracket can be
removed from the frame.
Fig. 85: Top support drive belt clamp
Remove the two fasteners holding the belt clamp (Item 1) and
remove the belt.
Siemens, 2008 CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Definition / AS / Flash
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
PHS-2/-3/-4 Mechanical 101
Page 101 of 354
3. Check the belt tension.
- Procedure using the belt tension meter
- Pull the top support fully out, away from the gantry. You should achieve a distance
of 435 mm between the rear pulley and the belt clamp.
- Place the sensor at the center of the trim length over the flat size of the belt. The dis-
tance between sensor and belt should be about 5 to 20 mm.
To learn how to use the tension meter, see the operating instructions delivered with
the meter.
- Start belt vibration by hitting it with the head of a screwdriver.
- Perform the measurement.
- The resonance frequency must be 75 +2 Hz for correct belt tension.
Fig. 86: Belt for top support
Fig. 87: Measuring tension of belt top support
102 PHS-2/-3/-4 Mechanical
Definition / AS / Flash CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Siemens, 2008
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
Page 102 of 354
NOTE The value 75 +2 Hz is only valid for a new belt. For other
cases, e.g. after replacement of the horizontal motor, the ten-
sion has to be adjusted to 70 +2 Hz.

4. Adjust the belt tension.
Startup 0
Electrical
1. Switch on circuit breakers F2, F3, F5, F6, F7, and F11 in the PDC A and F2 in the PDC
B (not for Definition AS).
First switch the F2, F3, F5, F6 circuit breakers to the 0 position and then to the
1 position.
2. Switch the system to the SYSTEM/ON status at the control box.
Software
n.a
Tune-up
n.a.
Fig. 88: Support belt adjuster
Use adjustment screw (Item 3) to set deflection of the belt to 20 - 22
mm and tighten clamping screw (item 2) to 11 Nm.
Tighten the locking nut (Item 1).
Siemens, 2008 CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Definition / AS / Flash
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
PHS-2/-3/-4 Mechanical 103
Page 103 of 354
Tests
1. Perform a test scan
Final Steps 0
1. Clean.
104 PHS-2/-3/-4 Mechanical
Definition / AS / Flash CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Siemens, 2008
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
Page 104 of 354
Tabletop Position Sensor 3.8
The following instructions are applicable to:
- PHS tabletop position sensor, material number 86 14 377
Prerequisites 0
Safety
WARNING
[ hz_serdoc_F13G01U12M03 ]
Avoid accident and injury or damage to parts.
Risk of accident and injury!
Read and observe the safety information contained in
the General section of this document and/or the
Product specific safety notes.
Time and Manpower
1 person
Estimated total repair time: 1.5 hours
Tools and auxiliary equipment
Standard service kit
Preliminary steps 0
1. Raise table to height of 125.
2. Switch system to COMP/ON at the control box.
3. Switch OFF the gantry/PHS power using service push-button S1 in the PDC.
Secure the circuit breakers that S1 switched OFF against unintended switch-on
(e.g. lock and tag).
NOTE Read and observe the safety information in the Prod-
uct-specific safety notes prior to performing service work
on the patient table. If the patient table power is switched off
for service work, always secure it against accidental
switch-on.

4. Release the telescopic covers (Telescopic covers: Releasing / p. 43).
5. Remove the lower rear tabletop cover (Tabletop lower rear cover / p. 32).
6. Feed in the table and remove the tabletop covers (Tabletop covers (front and
rear) / p. 29).
Siemens, 2008 CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Definition / AS / Flash
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
PHS-2/-3/-4 Mechanical 105
Page 105 of 354
Removing 0
1. Remove the sensor wire.
Fig. 89: Undertable view
Push tabletop plate to a position approximately 1.5 meters into the
gantry to access the sensor wire anchor point
and release from underneath, but do not remove the nut securing the
sensor wire.
From above, hold the sensor wire with one hand to prevent sudden
retraction and with other hand reach down underneath and remove
the nut.
Carefully allow wire to retract.
106 PHS-2/-3/-4 Mechanical
Definition / AS / Flash CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Siemens, 2008
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
Page 106 of 354
2. Remove the sensor.
Installation 0
T 1. Install sensor; tighten all 3 screws to 3 Nm.
2. Draw the sensor wire out and connect end into fixing point.
3. Reinstall all covers.
Startup 0
Electrical
1. Switch on circuit breakers F2, F3, F5, F6, F7, and F11 in the PDC A and F2 in the PDC
B (not for Definition AS).
First switch the F2, F3, F5, F6 circuit breakers to the 0 position and then to the
1 position.
2. Switch the system to the SYSTEM/ON status at the control box.
Software
n.a
Fig. 90: Tabletop sensor
Remove the plug from the sensor.
Remove the 3 screws holding the sensor.
Siemens, 2008 CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Definition / AS / Flash
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
PHS-2/-3/-4 Mechanical 107
Page 107 of 354
Tune-up
1. Perform the PHS calibration for tabletop.
Tests
1. Perform a test scan
Final Steps 0
1. Clean.
108 PHS-2/-3/-4 Mechanical
Definition / AS / Flash CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Siemens, 2008
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
Page 108 of 354
Top Support Position Sensor and Band (PHS-3 and PHS-4 only) 3.9
The following instructions are applicable to:
- PHS top support position sensor, material number 86 14 385
Prerequisites 0
Safety
WARNING
[ hz_serdoc_F13G01U12M03 ]
Avoid accident and injury or damage to parts.
Risk of accident and injury!
Read and observe the safety information contained in
the General section of this document and/or the
Product specific safety notes.
Time and Manpower
1 person
Estimated total repair time: 1 hr.
Tools and auxiliary equipment
Standard service kit
Feeler gauges e.g., material number 80 38 259
Preliminary steps 0
1. Switch system to COMP/ON at the control box.
2. Switch OFF the gantry/PHS power using service push-button S1 in the PDC.
Secure the circuit breakers that S1 switched OFF against unintended switch-on
(e.g. lock and tag).
NOTE Read and observe the safety information in the Prod-
uct-specific safety notes prior to performing service work
on the patient table. If the patient table power is switched off
for service work, always secure it against accidental
switch-on.

3. Switch off the gantry power using service push-button S1 in PDC A. Secure against
unintended switch-on.
4. Feed in the table and remove the tabletop covers (Tabletop covers (front and
rear) / p. 29).
Siemens, 2008 CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Definition / AS / Flash
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
PHS-2/-3/-4 Mechanical 109
Page 109 of 354
Removing 0
1. Remove the sensor.
2. Remove the magnetic band.
Fig. 91: Table support sensor
Push support to full inward position.
Remove the plug from sensor (Item 1).
Remove 2 securing nuts (Item 2) and lift out sensor.
Fig. 92: Table support sensor band
Push support to full outward position.
Remove clamp at each end of the band (Item 1).
Band is secured to frame with 2 sided tape; carefully lift the band
using a screwdriver or thin metal lever.
110 PHS-2/-3/-4 Mechanical
Definition / AS / Flash CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Siemens, 2008
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
Page 110 of 354
Installation 0
1. Clean all tape residue from area of band.
2. Apply supplied 2-sided tape to back of new band and secure at correct position on
frame.
T 3. Reinstall band end clamps. Tighten to 3 Nm.
4. Install the sensor. Use feeler gauge to set 0.5 mm clearance to magnetic band. Tighten
the nuts to 6 Nm.
5. Install the plug at the sensor.
Startup 0
Electrical
1. Switch on circuit breakers F2, F3, F5, F6, F7, and F11 in the PDC A and F2 in the PDC
B (not for Definition AS).
First switch the F2, F3, F5, F6 circuit breakers to the 0 position and then to the
1 position.
2. Switch the system to the SYSTEM/ON status at the control box.
Software
n.a
Tune-up
1. Perform the PHS calibration for top support.
Tests
1. Perform a test scan
Final Steps 0
1. Clean.
Siemens, 2008 CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Definition / AS / Flash
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
PHS-2/-3/-4 Mechanical 111
Page 111 of 354
Vertical position sensor 3.10
The following instructions are applicable to:
- PHS vertical sensor, material number 86 14 435
Prerequisites 0
Safety
WARNING
[ hz_serdoc_F13G01U12M03 ]
Avoid accident and injury or damage to parts.
Risk of accident and injury!
Read and observe the safety information contained in
the General section of this document and/or the
Product specific safety notes.
Time and Manpower
1 person
Estimated total repair time: 1 hr.
Tools and auxiliary equipment
Standard service kit
Preliminary steps 0
1. Raise table to height of 125.
2. Switch system to COMP/ON at the control box.
3. Switch OFF the gantry/PHS power using service push-button S1 in the PDC.
Secure the circuit breakers that S1 switched OFF against unintended switch-on
(e.g. lock and tag).
NOTE Read and observe the safety information in the Prod-
uct-specific safety notes prior to performing service work
on the patient table. If the patient table power is switched off
for service work, always secure it against accidental
switch-on.

4. Release the telescopic covers (Telescopic covers: Releasing / p. 43).
5. Remove the telescopic covers (Telescopic covers: Removing / p. 52).
112 PHS-2/-3/-4 Mechanical
Definition / AS / Flash CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Siemens, 2008
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
Page 112 of 354
Removing 0
1. Remove U711-X7 at the vertical motor controller and cut the cable ties as required to
release the sensor cable.
2. Remove the sensor.
Installation 0
1. Installation is the reverse of disassembly, mounting screw should be positioned in the
center of the adjusting slot.
Startup 0
Electrical
1. Switch on circuit breakers F2, F3, F5, F6, F7, and F11 in the PDC A and F2 in the PDC
B (not for Definition AS).
First switch the F2, F3, F5, F6 circuit breakers to the 0 position and then to the
1 position.
2. Switch the system to the SYSTEM/ON status at the control box.
Software
n.a
Fig. 93: Vertical position sensor
Sensor shown on removed drive for clarity.
Loosen shaft clamp (item 1).
Remove mounting screw (item 2) and pull sensor out from drive.
Siemens, 2008 CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Definition / AS / Flash
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
PHS-2/-3/-4 Mechanical 113
Page 113 of 354
Tune-up
1. Perform the PHS calibration for vertical positioning.
Tests
1. Perform a test scan
Final Steps 0
1. Clean.
114 PHS-2/-3/-4 Mechanical
Definition / AS / Flash CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Siemens, 2008
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
Page 114 of 354
Vertical Microswitches 3.11
The following instructions are applicable to:
- PHS microswitches S711, S713, S718
Safety nut switch S717
Old and new versions of microswitches are available.
Both microswitch types have a different pin assignment:
Prerequisites 0
Safety
WARNING
[ hz_serdoc_F13G01U12M03 ]
Avoid accident and injury or damage to parts.
Risk of accident and injury!
Read and observe the safety information contained in
the General section of this document and/or the
Product specific safety notes.
Time and Manpower
1 person
Estimated total repair time: 1 hr.
Tools and auxiliary equipment
Standard service kit
Preliminary steps 0
1. Raise table to height of 125.
2. Switch system to COMP/ON at the control box.
Fig. 94: Microswitch versions
Pos. 1 Old type (manufacturer Marquardt)
Pos. 2 New type (manufacturer Cherry)
Siemens, 2008 CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Definition / AS / Flash
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
PHS-2/-3/-4 Mechanical 115
Page 115 of 354
3. Switch OFF the gantry/PHS power using service push-button S1 in the PDC.
Secure the circuit breakers that S1 switched OFF against unintended switch-on
(e.g. lock and tag).
NOTE Read and observe the safety information in the Prod-
uct-specific safety notes prior to performing service work
on the patient table. If the patient table power is switched off
for service work, always secure it against accidental
switch-on.

4. Release the telescopic covers (Telescopic covers: Releasing / p. 43).
Replacement 0
NOTE All replaceable switches are attached by two screws.
S717 screws are secured with Loctite.

Removal:
1. Disconnect the wires.
2. Remove the screws; avoid breaking off the screws or damaging the screw head.
3. Remove the switch and the insulating pad.
Installation:
1. Install the new switch and the insulating pad following the removal instructions in
reverse order.
2. Tighten the screws with 0.8 Nm.
3. Reconnect the wires; observe the different pin assignments of old (Marquardt = red)
and new (Cherry = white) microswitch type (1,2/Fig. 94 / p. 114).
116 PHS-2/-3/-4 Mechanical
Definition / AS / Flash CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Siemens, 2008
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
Page 116 of 354
1. Upper safety limit switch (S711) and lower safety limit switch (S713):
Fig. 95: Safety limit switches (old version) Fig. 96: Safety limit switches (new version)
Siemens, 2008 CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Definition / AS / Flash
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
PHS-2/-3/-4 Mechanical 117
Page 117 of 354
In normal operation when using the gantry controls, the software lim-
its the vertical movement to 10 mm before the mechanical limit; how-
ever, this position is referenced to the floor and can be affected by
shimming. Therefore, the microswitches are adjusted to operate 5
mm before the mechanical limit. Using the service movement
switches will allow the table to raise or lower until the microswitch
operates.
Turn on F7 and raise the table using the Service controls (Service
movement of PHS / p. 21) to a position just before the mechanical
limit.
Do not drive to the mechanical limit.
Turn off F7.
Use a 6 mm hex key in the manual lift screw (Manual vertical move-
ment of tabletop / p. 22) and move the table to the mechanical limit.
Measure the table height from the floor and note down this measure-
ment.
Move the table height to a position 5 mm away from the mechanical
limit.
Adjust the microswitch by releasing the adjuster nut (Item 1) and slid-
ing the carrier so that it operates at this point; use the service move-
ment switches to check the final position.
118 PHS-2/-3/-4 Mechanical
Definition / AS / Flash CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Siemens, 2008
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
Page 118 of 354
2. Safety nut switch S717:
Fig. 97: Disconnect and safety nut switches
The safety nut switch (Item 2) is installed close to the spindle hous-
ing. A shear nut inside the drive will break if too much strain is
applied. If it breaks, the outer bushing drops and S717 is pressed,
causing an emergency stop.
If the machine groove is not visible, the complete vertical drive
assembly should be replaced.
Siemens, 2008 CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Definition / AS / Flash
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
PHS-2/-3/-4 Mechanical 119
Page 119 of 354
3. Disconnect safety switch S718 (3/Fig. 97 / p. 118):
Install S717 following the removal instructions in reverse order:
Fig. 98: Safety nut switch S717
Pos. 1 1 mm distance
Install the new switch with insulating pad, actuator and metal ball.
Adjust a distance of 1.0 mm between spindle housing and actuator
(1/Fig. 98 / p. 119).
Fig. 99: S718 (old version) Fig. 100: S718 (new version)
120 PHS-2/-3/-4 Mechanical
Definition / AS / Flash CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Siemens, 2008
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
Page 120 of 354
- The disconnect safety switch is normally operated and will release if the drive motor
lifts due to a blockage.
- Adjust the microswitch vertically using the switch screws (shown at [1]) and horizon-
tally using the bracket fasteners (shown at [2]).
- The operation can be checked by installing the safety bolts and manually lowering
the table using a 6 mm hex key until the motor lifts (Manual vertical movement of
tabletop / p. 22). Check to make sure that the microswitch releases.
Startup 0
Electrical
1. Switch on circuit breakers F2, F3, F5, F6, F7, and F11 in the PDC A and F2 in the PDC
B (not for Definition AS).
First switch the F2, F3, F5, F6 circuit breakers to the 0 position and then to the
1 position.
2. Switch the system to the SYSTEM/ON status at the control box.
Software
n.a
Tune-up
n.a
Tests
1. Move the patient table to various vertical positions.
2. Perform test scans (Topo, spiral).
Final Steps 0
1. Install all PHS covers.
2. Clean the covers.
Siemens, 2008 CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Definition / AS / Flash
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
PHS-2/PHS-3/PHS-4 Electronics 121
Page 121 of 354
4- 4PHS-2/PHS-3/PHS-4 Electronics
Overview 0
This chapter describes the removal and replacement of the PHS electronic components.
Fig. 101: Location of parts in electronics tray
Components described in this document:
Electronics tray components.
- Power supplies (Item 1)
- Vertical Controller (Item 2)
- Table master board (LMAS/LMAS-2/LMAS-3) (see [3])
- Brake resistor (Item 4)
- Contactors, diodes, and fuses (Item 5)
Motor controllers. Both top and support controllers are located under the tabletop
plate.
Holding solenoid (PHS-4 only)
Software version Comment
LMAS SW versions below
VA20
only installed on the PHS-3
(Somatom Definition)
LMAS-2 Software versions VA20
up to but not including
VA40
installed in PHS-2, PHS-3,
PHS-4
LMAS-3 software versions VA40
and higher (ex-factory)
installed in PHS-4, serial
numbers 1306 and higher
can be installed in every PHS
running VA40
122 PHS-2/PHS-3/PHS-4 Electronics
Definition / AS / Flash CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Siemens, 2008
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
Page 122 of 354
PMM Module. Mounted at the back of the tabletop plate.
Cable sets. PHS cable set, PMM vertical, and horizontal cable sets.
Siemens, 2008 CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Definition / AS / Flash
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
PHS-2/PHS-3/PHS-4 Electronics 123
Page 123 of 354
Power Supplies 4.1
The following instructions are applicable to:
- PHS-2 and PHS-3 power supplies (G701, G702), material number 86 14 500
PHS-4 power supplies, material number 86 14 500 (G701) and material number 86
18 113 (G702)
Prerequisites 0
Safety
WARNING
[ hz_serdoc_F13G01U12M03 ]
Avoid accident and injury or damage to parts.
Risk of accident and injury!
Read and observe the safety information contained in
the General section of this document and/or the
Product specific safety notes.
Time and manpower
1 person
Estimated total repair time: 30 min.
Tools and Auxiliary Equipment
Standard service kit
Preliminary steps 0
1. Raise the patient table to height of 125.
2. Switch system to COMP/ON at the control box.
3. Switch OFF the gantry/PHS power using service push-button S1 in the PDC.
Secure the circuit breakers that S1 switched OFF against unintended switch-on
(e.g. lock and tag).
NOTE Read and observe the safety information in the Prod-
uct-specific safety notes prior to performing service work
on the patient table. If the patient table power is switched off
for service work, always secure it against accidental
switch-on.

4. Remove the electronics cover (Table electronics cover / p. 57).
124 PHS-2/PHS-3/PHS-4 Electronics
Definition / AS / Flash CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Siemens, 2008
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
Page 124 of 354
Removing 0
1. Remove power supply cover.
2. Remove the power supply.
Installation 0
1. Install securing nut and standoffs.
2. Install the cover and connector.
3. Reinstall electronics cover.
Fig. 102: Power supply cover
Remove the connector.
Remove nuts securing cover (Item 1) and lift off cover.
Fig. 103: Power supply securing fasteners
Remove standoffs (Item 1) and nut (Item 2) and lift power supply
away.
Siemens, 2008 CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Definition / AS / Flash
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
PHS-2/PHS-3/PHS-4 Electronics 125
Page 125 of 354
Startup 0
Electrical
1. Switch on circuit breakers F2, F3, F5, F6, F7, and F11 in the PDC A and F2 in the PDC
B (not for Definition AS).
First switch the F2, F3, F5, F6 circuit breakers to the 0 position and then to the
1 position.
2. Switch the system to the SYSTEM/ON status at the control box.
Software
n.a.
Tune-up
n.a.
Tests
1. Perform a test scan
Final Steps 0
1. Clean.
126 PHS-2/PHS-3/PHS-4 Electronics
Definition / AS / Flash CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Siemens, 2008
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
Page 126 of 354
Contactor, relays and diode 4.2
The following instructions are applicable to:
- PHS-2, material number 86 16 026
- PHS-3, material number 86 16 034
- PHS-4, material number 80 97 144
Prerequisites 0
Safety
WARNING
[ hz_serdoc_F13G01U12M03 ]
Avoid accident and injury or damage to parts.
Risk of accident and injury!
Read and observe the safety information contained in
the General section of this document and/or the
Product specific safety notes.
Time and manpower
1 person
Estimated total repair time: 30 min. per item.
Tools and Auxiliary Equipment
Standard service kit
Preliminary steps 0
1. Raise the patient table to height of 125.
2. Switch system to COMP/ON at the control box.
3. Switch OFF the gantry/PHS power using service push-button S1 in the PDC.
Secure the circuit breakers that S1 switched OFF against unintended switch-on
(e.g. lock and tag).
NOTE Read and observe the safety information in the Prod-
uct-specific safety notes prior to performing service work
on the patient table. If the patient table power is switched off
for service work, always secure it against accidental
switch-on.

4. Remove the electronics cover (Table electronics cover / p. 57).
Siemens, 2008 CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Definition / AS / Flash
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
PHS-2/PHS-3/PHS-4 Electronics 127
Page 127 of 354
Removing 0
1. Removing parts
Installation 0
1. Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Startup 0
Electrical
1. Switch on circuit breakers F2, F3, F5, F6, F7, and F11 in the PDC A and F2 in the PDC
B (not for Definition AS).
First switch the F2, F3, F5, F6 circuit breakers to the 0 position and then to the
1 position.
Fig. 104: Location of relays, contactor, and diode block
Remove wires, check that the markings are clear and understand-
able.
K711 vertical brake relay (shown at [1]), K709 AC power sensing
relay (shown at [2]), and K701 safety contactor (shown at [3]) are all
released by removing the clamp on the respective mounting rail (e.g.
[5]).
The rectifier diode V702 (shown at [4]) is secured by a single fas-
tener.
128 PHS-2/PHS-3/PHS-4 Electronics
Definition / AS / Flash CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Siemens, 2008
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
Page 128 of 354
2. Switch the system to the SYSTEM/ON status at the control box.
Software
n.a.
Tune-up
n.a.
Tests
1. Perform a test scan
Final Steps 0
1. Clean.
Siemens, 2008 CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Definition / AS / Flash
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
PHS-2/PHS-3/PHS-4 Electronics 129
Page 129 of 354
Fuses 4.3
The following instructions are applicable to:
- PHS-2, material number 86 16 026
- PHS-3, material number 86 16 034
- PHS-4, material number 80 97 144
Prerequisites 0
Safety
WARNING
[ hz_serdoc_F13G01U12M03 ]
Avoid accident and injury or damage to parts.
Risk of accident and injury!
Read and observe the safety information contained in
the General section of this document and/or the
Product specific safety notes.
Time and manpower
1 person
Estimated total repair time: 20 min.
Tools and Auxiliary Equipment
Standard service kit
Preliminary steps 0
1. Raise the patient table to height of 125.
2. Switch system to COMP/ON at the control box.
3. Switch OFF the gantry/PHS power using service push-button S1 in the PDC.
Secure the circuit breakers that S1 switched OFF against unintended switch-on
(e.g. lock and tag).
NOTE Read and observe the safety information in the Prod-
uct-specific safety notes prior to performing service work
on the patient table. If the patient table power is switched off
for service work, always secure it against accidental
switch-on.

4. Remove the electronics cover (Table electronics cover / p. 57).
130 PHS-2/PHS-3/PHS-4 Electronics
Definition / AS / Flash CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Siemens, 2008
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
Page 130 of 354
Removing 0
1. Remove the fuse.
Installation 0
1. Position fuse as shown in the figure and close cover; the cover will locate the fuse into
the contacts.
2. Rotate the fuse holder back to the original position.
Startup 0
Electrical
1. Switch on circuit breakers F2, F3, F5, F6, F7, and F11 in the PDC A and F2 in the PDC
B (not for Definition AS).
First switch the F2, F3, F5, F6 circuit breakers to the 0 position and then to the
1 position.
2. Switch the system to the SYSTEM/ON status at the control box.
Software
n.a.
Fig. 105: Replacing fuses
Rotate the fuse holder 90 degrees by lifting the tab located at the
gantry end (Item 1).
Pull the tab (Item 2) to open the cover; the fuse will be pushed out by
a small pin to the position shown in the figure.
Remove the fuse.
Siemens, 2008 CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Definition / AS / Flash
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
PHS-2/PHS-3/PHS-4 Electronics 131
Page 131 of 354
Tune-up
n.a.
Tests
1. Perform a test scan
Final Steps 0
1. Clean.
132 PHS-2/PHS-3/PHS-4 Electronics
Definition / AS / Flash CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Siemens, 2008
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
Page 132 of 354
Table Master Board (LMAS) > for PHS-3 with SW VA11 ONLY !! 4.4
NOTE The following instructions are only valid for LMAS boards
operating in the PHS-3 patient table with software version
VA11.

The following instructions are applicable to:
- PHS LMAS Assembly, material number 86 14 526
Prerequisites 0
Safety
WARNING
[ hz_serdoc_F13G01U12M03 ]
Avoid accident and injury or damage to parts.
Risk of accident and injury!
Read and observe the safety information contained in
the General section of this document and/or the
Product specific safety notes.
Time and manpower
1 person
Estimated total repair time: 45 min.
Tools and Auxiliary Equipment
Standard service kit
Siemens, 2008 CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Definition / AS / Flash
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
PHS-2/PHS-3/PHS-4 Electronics 133
Page 133 of 354
Storage of table T3C PHS - LMAS
NOTE PHS relevant parameters are stored in the configuration table
T3C. Table T3C is stored on the PHS-LMAS board - Source:
Volatile. If the LMAS board is replaced the original T3C has to
be restored on the new LMAS; otherwise, the PHS may not
function correctly.
There are two ways to save the original T3C table
1. Prior to removing the old LMAS board, perform function
Service > Control > table load/modify. Select table T3C,
set radio button Volatile and press <Go> to display the
table. Select radio button Persistent and press <Go> to
back it up on the UMAS board.
2. The original T3C is already stored on the UMAS because
this step is performed automatically with every PHS
adjustment (vertical or horizontal). You may check if a
PHS adjustment was performed in the past.
Restoring the T3C table on the new LMAS board:
Use function Service > Control > table load/modify. Select
table T3C, set radio button Persistent and press <GO> to
display the table stored at the UMAS. Select radio button
Volatile and press <Go> to download it onto the LMAS.

Select Local_Service > TuneUp.
Select FRU Replace.
Select PHS - LMAS.
Press <Go> to start the tour.
- Save table T3C prior to replacing the part and restore table T3C after replacement as
described in the above note.
The Guided Tour has been completed successfully if the TC3 is restored on the
new component.
Preliminary steps 0
1. Raise the patient table to maximum height for better access.
2. Switch system to COMP/ON at the control box.
3. Switch OFF the gantry/PHS power using service push-button S1 in the PDC.
Secure the circuit breakers that S1 switched OFF against unintended switch-on
(e.g. lock and tag).
134 PHS-2/PHS-3/PHS-4 Electronics
Definition / AS / Flash CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Siemens, 2008
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
Page 134 of 354
NOTE Read and observe the safety information in the Prod-
uct-specific safety notes prior to performing service work
on the patient table. If the patient table power is switched off
for service work, always secure it against accidental
switch-on.

4. Remove the electronics cover (Table electronics cover / p. 57).
Removing 0
1. Remove the LMAS board.
Installation 0
T 1. Secure assembly to electronics tray with the 2 nuts and tighten to 3 Nm.
2. Reinstall all connectors.
3. Reinstall electronics cover.
Startup 0
Electrical
1. Switch on circuit breakers F2, F3, F5, F6, F7, and F11 in the PDC A and F2 in the PDC
B (not for Definition AS).
First switch the F2, F3, F5, F6 circuit breakers to the 0 position and then to the
1 position.
Fig. 106: LMAS securing fasteners
Remove all connectors from LMAS board.
Remove the 2 nuts securing the board (Item 1).
Siemens, 2008 CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Definition / AS / Flash
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
PHS-2/PHS-3/PHS-4 Electronics 135
Page 135 of 354
2. Switch the system to the SYSTEM/ON status at the control box.
Software
The firmware will be automatically loaded at power on.
Tune-up
1. Execute and follow the Guided Tour for FRU replacement
2. Restart the application to verify the FW actualization.
3. Perform all PHS adjustments
Tests
1. Perform the image quality test (table feed).
Final Steps 0
1. Clean.
136 PHS-2/PHS-3/PHS-4 Electronics
Definition / AS / Flash CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Siemens, 2008
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
Page 136 of 354
Table master board (LMAS-2 and LMAS-3) 4.5
The following instructions are applicable to:
- Table master board (LMAS-2), material number 86 12 413
- Table master board (LMAS-3), material number 106 43 790
NOTE Do not replace LMAS and motor controllers at the same time!
If you are uncertain which component is causing the prob-
lem, finish replacing one part before you replace the next.

Prerequisites 0
Safety
WARNING
[ hz_serdoc_F13G01U12M03 ]
Avoid accident and injury or damage to parts.
Risk of accident and injury!
Read and observe the safety information contained in
the General section of this document and/or the
Product specific safety notes.
Time and manpower
1 person
Estimated total repair time: 45 min.
Tools and Auxiliary Equipment
Standard service kit
Preliminary steps 0
1. Raise the patient table to maximum height for better access.
2. Switch system to COMP/ON at the control box.
3. Switch OFF the gantry/PHS power using service push-button S1 in the PDC.
Secure the circuit breakers that S1 switched OFF against unintended switch-on
(e.g. lock and tag).
Siemens, 2008 CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Definition / AS / Flash
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
PHS-2/PHS-3/PHS-4 Electronics 137
Page 137 of 354
NOTE Read and observe the safety information in the Prod-
uct-specific safety notes prior to performing service work
on the patient table. If the patient table power is switched off
for service work, always secure it against accidental
switch-on.

4. Remove the electronics cover (Table electronics cover / p. 57).
Removing 0
1. Remove LMAS-2/-3 board.
NOTE The figure below shows the LMAS-2 board as an example.
The attachment points of the LMAS-3 are identical.

Installation 0
T 1. Secure assembly to electronics tray with the 2 nuts and tighten to 3 Nm.
2. Reinstall all connectors.
Note: Make sure that cable X301 is plugged into X302. Cable X302 does not get
plugged into LMAS-2 and LMAS-3.
3. Reinstall electronics cover.
Fig. 107: LMAS securing fasteners
Remove all connectors from board.
Remove the 2 nuts securing the board (Item 1).
138 PHS-2/PHS-3/PHS-4 Electronics
Definition / AS / Flash CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Siemens, 2008
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
Page 138 of 354
Startup 0
Electrical
1. Switch on circuit breakers F2, F3, F5, F6, F7, and F11 in the PDC A and F2 in the PDC
B (not for Definition AS).
First switch the F2, F3, F5, F6 circuit breakers to the 0 position and then to the
1 position.
2. Switch the system to SYSTEM/ON status on the control box.
Software
The firmware will be automatically loaded at power on.
Tune-up
Select: Local_Service > TuneUp
Select: FRU Replace
Select: PHS - LMAS
Press <Go> to start the tour.
The Auto_Complete is started and checks which adjustments are required.
Follow the instructions of the Auto_Complete routine.
Tests
1. Check all table movements (horizontal/vertical) via the buttons at the gantry control
panels.
2. Perform a test scan.
Final Steps 0
1. Clean.
Siemens, 2008 CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Definition / AS / Flash
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
PHS-2/PHS-3/PHS-4 Electronics 139
Page 139 of 354
Brake resistor 4.6
The following instructions are applicable to:
- PHS-2, material number 86 16 026
- PHS-3, material number 86 16 034
- PHS-4, material number 80 97 144
Prerequisites 0
Safety
WARNING
[ hz_serdoc_F13G01U12M03 ]
Avoid accident and injury or damage to parts.
Risk of accident and injury!
Read and observe the safety information contained in
the General section of this document and/or the
Product specific safety notes.
Time and manpower
1 person
Estimated total repair time: 1 hr.
Tools and Auxiliary Equipment
Standard service kit
Preliminary steps 0
1. Raise table to height of 125.
2. Switch system to COMP/ON at the control box.
3. Switch OFF the gantry/PHS power using service push-button S1 in the PDC.
Secure the circuit breakers that S1 switched OFF against unintended switch-on
(e.g. lock and tag).
NOTE Read and observe the safety information in the Prod-
uct-specific safety notes prior to performing service work
on the patient table. If the patient table power is switched off
for service work, always secure it against accidental
switch-on.

4. Release the telescopic covers (Telescopic covers: Releasing / p. 43).
5. Remove the telescopic covers (Telescopic covers: Removing / p. 52).
6. Remove the electronics cover (Table electronics cover / p. 57).
140 PHS-2/PHS-3/PHS-4 Electronics
Definition / AS / Flash CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Siemens, 2008
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
Page 140 of 354
Removing 0
1. Remove brake resistor.
Installation 0
1. Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Startup 0
Electrical
1. Switch on circuit breakers F2, F3, F5, F6, F7, and F11 in the PDC A and F2 in the PDC
B (not for Definition AS).
First switch the F2, F3, F5, F6 circuit breakers to the 0 position and then to the
1 position.
2. Switch the system to the SYSTEM/ON status at the control box.
Software
n.a.
Tune-up
n.a.
Fig. 108: Brake resistor
Cut all cable ties and release X_719.
Remove the 2 securing screws (Item 1).
Siemens, 2008 CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Definition / AS / Flash
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
PHS-2/PHS-3/PHS-4 Electronics 141
Page 141 of 354
Tests
1. Perform a test scan
Final Steps 0
1. Clean.
142 PHS-2/PHS-3/PHS-4 Electronics
Definition / AS / Flash CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Siemens, 2008
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
Page 142 of 354
Vertical motor controller 4.7
The following instructions are applicable to:
- PHS vertical motor controller LUST, material number 86 14 518
NOTE Do not replace LMAS and motor controllers at the same time!
If you are uncertain which component is causing the prob-
lem, finish replacing one part before you replace the next.

Prerequisites 0
Safety
WARNING
[ hz_serdoc_F13G01U12M03 ]
Avoid accident and injury or damage to parts.
Risk of accident and injury!
Read and observe the safety information contained in
the General section of this document and/or the
Product specific safety notes.
Time and manpower
1 person
Estimated total repair time: 45 min.
Tools and Auxiliary Equipment
Standard service kit
Preliminary steps 0
1. Raise the patient table to height of 125.
2. Switch system to COMP/ON at the control box.
3. Switch OFF the gantry/PHS power using service push-button S1 in the PDC.
Secure the circuit breakers that S1 switched OFF against unintended switch-on
(e.g. lock and tag).
NOTE Read and observe the safety information in the Prod-
uct-specific safety notes prior to performing service work
on the patient table. If the patient table power is switched off
for service work, always secure it against accidental
switch-on.

Siemens, 2008 CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Definition / AS / Flash
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
PHS-2/PHS-3/PHS-4 Electronics 143
Page 143 of 354
4. Remove the electronics cover (Table electronics cover / p. 57).
Removing 0
1. Remove the vertical controller.
Installation 0
1. Check switch S3 on the inverter and set switch to Pos.1.
S3 must be in Pos.1
2. Transfer bracket from the old part to the new one.
T 3. Secure assembly to electronics tray, tighten nuts to 3 Nm, and reinstall all connectors.
4. Reinstall the covers.
Startup 0
Electrical
1. Switch on circuit breakers F2, F3, F5, F6, F7, and F11 in the PDC A and F2 in the PDC
B (not for Definition AS).
First switch the F2, F3, F5, F6 circuit breakers to the 0 position and then to the
1 position.
2. Switch the system to the SYSTEM/ON status at the control box.
Software
n.a.
Fig. 109: Vertical motor controller
Remove all connectors.
Remove 2 brackets holding nuts (Item 1).
144 PHS-2/PHS-3/PHS-4 Electronics
Definition / AS / Flash CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Siemens, 2008
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
Page 144 of 354
Tune-up (for VA11 only)
1. Execute and follow the Guided Tour for FRU replacement.
2. Perform the vertical calibration.
Tune-up (beginning with VA20)
Select: Local_Service > TuneUp
Select: FRU Replace
Select: PHS - Motor controller hor./vert.
Press <Go> to start the tour.
The Auto_Complete is started and checks which adjustments are required.
Follow the instructions of the Auto_Complete routine.
Tests
1. Perform a test scan
Final Steps 0
1. Clean.
Siemens, 2008 CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Definition / AS / Flash
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
PHS-2/PHS-3/PHS-4 Electronics 145
Page 145 of 354
Horizontal Motor Controller (Tabletop / Table Support) 4.8
The following instructions are applicable to:
- PHS motor controller, material number 86 14 401
NOTE The PHS-2 patient table does not have top support move-
ment, and therefore, no horizontal motor for the top support.

NOTE Do not replace LMAS and motor controllers at the same time!
If you are uncertain which component is causing the prob-
lem, finish replacing one part before you replace the next.

Prerequisites 0
Safety
WARNING
[ hz_serdoc_F13G01U12M03 ]
Avoid accident and injury or damage to parts.
Risk of accident and injury!
Read and observe the safety information contained in
the General section of this document and/or the
Product specific safety notes.
Time and manpower
1 person
Estimated total repair time: 45 min.
Tools and Auxiliary Equipment
Standard service kit
Preliminary steps 0
1. Raise table to maximum table height.
2. Switch system to COMP/ON at the control box.
3. Switch OFF the gantry/PHS power using service push-button S1 in the PDC.
Secure the circuit breakers that S1 switched OFF against unintended switch-on
(e.g. lock and tag).
146 PHS-2/PHS-3/PHS-4 Electronics
Definition / AS / Flash CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Siemens, 2008
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
Page 146 of 354
NOTE Read and observe the safety information in the Prod-
uct-specific safety notes prior to performing service work
on the patient table. If the patient table power is switched off
for service work, always secure it against accidental
switch-on.

4. Feed in the tabletop plate and remove the tabletop plate covers (Tabletop covers (front
and rear) / p. 29).
Removing 0
1. Remove motor controller.
Fig. 110: View of back
Tabletop controller is at the back of the table (item 1), tabletop sup-
port controller is at the front (item 2).
Remove all connectors.
Release the 2 holding screws.
Siemens, 2008 CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Definition / AS / Flash
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
PHS-2/PHS-3/PHS-4 Electronics 147
Page 147 of 354
Installation 0
1. Check switch S1 on the inverter and set switch as follows:
Tabletop inverter (item 1): S1 must be in Pos.3
Top support inverter (item 2): S1 must be in Pos.2
2. Install mounting screws and connect all cables.
3. Reinstall all covers.
Startup 0
Electrical
1. Switch on circuit breakers F2, F3, F5, F6, F7, and F11 in the PDC A and F2 in the PDC
B (not for Definition AS).
First switch the F2, F3, F5, F6 circuit breakers to the 0 position and then to the
1 position.
2. Switch the system to the SYSTEM/ON status at the control box.
Software
n.a.
Tune-up (for VA11 only)
1. Execute and follow the Guided Tour for FRU replacement.
2. Perform the vertical calibration.
Tune-up (beginning with VA20)
Select: Local_Service > TuneUp
Select: FRU Replace
Select: PHS - Motor controller hor./vert.
Press <Go> to start the tour.
The Auto_Complete is started and checks which adjustments are required.
Follow the instructions of the Auto_Complete routine.
Tests
1. Perform a test scan
Final Steps 0
1. Clean.
148 PHS-2/PHS-3/PHS-4 Electronics
Definition / AS / Flash CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Siemens, 2008
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
Page 148 of 354
Holding solenoid (PHS-4 only) 4.9
The following instructions are applicable to:
- Holding solenoid, material number 86 18 121
Prerequisites 0
Safety
WARNING
[ hz_serdoc_F13G01U12M03 ]
Avoid accident and injury or damage to parts.
Risk of accident and injury!
Read and observe the safety information contained in
the General section of this document and/or the
Product specific safety notes.
Time and manpower
1 person
Estimated total repair time: 45 min.
Tools and auxiliary equipment
Standard service kit
Preliminary steps 0
1. Lower the telescopic covers as described in (Telescopic covers: Releasing / p. 43)
2. Switch system to COMP/ON at the control box.
3. Switch OFF the gantry/PHS power using service push-button S1 in the PDC.
Secure the circuit breakers that S1 switched OFF against unintended switch-on
(e.g. lock and tag).
NOTE Read and observe the safety information in the Prod-
uct-specific safety notes prior to performing service work
on the patient table. If the patient table power is switched off
for service work, always secure it against accidental
switch-on.

4. Switch off the gantry power using service push-button S1 in PDC A. Secure against
unintended switch-on.
Siemens, 2008 CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Definition / AS / Flash
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
PHS-2/PHS-3/PHS-4 Electronics 149
Page 149 of 354
Removal 0
1. Disconnect the wires on the holding solenoid.
Fig. 111: Opening the connection box
Open the plastic cap of the connection box using a small screwdriver.
Fig. 112: Connection of the holding solenoid
Loosen the connection screw for the wires
Remove the cable.
150 PHS-2/PHS-3/PHS-4 Electronics
Definition / AS / Flash CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Siemens, 2008
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
Page 150 of 354
2. Remove the holding solenoid.
Installation 0
1. Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
2. Reinstall all covers.
Startup 0
Electrical
1. Switch on circuit breakers F2, F3, F5, F6, F7, and F11 in the PDC A and F2 in the PDC
B (not for Definition AS).
First switch the F2, F3, F5, F6 circuit breakers to the 0 position and then to the
1 position.
2. Switch the system to the SYSTEM/ON status at the control box.
Software
n.a.
Tune-up
n.a.
Tests
1. Test the function of the system
Fig. 113: Attachment of the holding solenoid
Open the screw using a 4-mm Allen key.
Remove the holding solenoid.
Siemens, 2008 CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Definition / AS / Flash
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
PHS-2/PHS-3/PHS-4 Electronics 151
Page 151 of 354
PMM Module 4.10
The following instructions are applicable to:
- PMM Module, material number 19 78 451
Prerequisites 0
Safety
WARNING
[ hz_serdoc_F13G01U12M03 ]
Avoid accident and injury or damage to parts.
Risk of accident and injury!
Read and observe the safety information contained in
the General section of this document and/or the
Product specific safety notes.
Time and manpower
1 person
Estimated total repair time: 20 min.
Tools and Auxiliary Equipment
Standard service kit
Preliminary steps 0
1. Raise the patient table to height of 125.
2. Shut down the system software (click <SYSTEM> and select <END> in the user main
menu).
3. Click Shutdown System
4. Confirm with Yes in the dialog box displayed.
NOTE Read and observe the safety information in the Prod-
uct-specific safety notes prior to performing service work
on the patient table. If the patient table power is switched off
for service work, always secure it against accidental
switch-on.

152 PHS-2/PHS-3/PHS-4 Electronics
Definition / AS / Flash CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Siemens, 2008
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
Page 152 of 354
Removing 0
1. Remove the PMM module.
2. Release the plug.
Fig. 114: PMM module securing screws
Remove plastic caps and release 2 screws holding the PMM module
in the PMM box.
Fig. 115: PMM plug and terminator
Lift out the module and disconnect plug X1 - see (1).
Only for PMMs with revision level lower than 05: Remove external
CanOpen terminator X2 - see (2).
Siemens, 2008 CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Definition / AS / Flash
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
PHS-2/PHS-3/PHS-4 Electronics 153
Page 153 of 354
Installation 0
1. Installation is in reverse order of removal.
NOTE On PMMs with revision level 05 and higher, the CanOpen ter-
minator is installed in the module. Therefore, the external
resistor in plug X2 is no longer required.
Do not install plug X2!

Startup 0
Electrical
1. Press the Sys On key on the control box. The whole system is ready for operation when
the Sys On LED is lit and the operating elements on the control box are backlit.
Software
1. If the system shows a fatal firmware mismatch, the new firmware has to be installed:
Go to Local Service > Control > Firmware to load the current firmware version.
Tune-up
n.a.
Tests
1. Activate the ECG Monitor Demo mode.
- Select: Control > Configuration
- Select: Heartview
- Mark the checkbox ECG Monitor Demo mode
- Press <Apply>
An ECG pulse must be seen on the gantry display.
2. Deactivate the ECG Monitor Demo mode by deselecting the checkbox in the Heartview
window.
Final Steps 0
1. Clean.
154 PHS-2/PHS-3/PHS-4 Electronics
Definition / AS / Flash CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Siemens, 2008
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
Page 154 of 354
PMM Cable (Top Support) 4.11
The following instructions are applicable to:
- PHS PMM cable top support, 86 14 757
Prerequisites 0
Safety
WARNING
[ hz_serdoc_F13G01U12M03 ]
Avoid accident and injury or damage to parts.
Risk of accident and injury!
Read and observe the safety information contained in
the General section of this document and/or the
Product specific safety notes.
Time and manpower
1 person
Estimated total repair time: 45 min.
Tools and Auxiliary Equipment
Standard service kit
Preliminary steps 0
1. Raise table to height of 125.
2. Switch system to COMP/ON at the control box.
3. Switch OFF the gantry/PHS power using service push-button S1 in the PDC.
Secure the circuit breakers that S1 switched OFF against unintended switch-on
(e.g. lock and tag).
NOTE Read and observe the safety information in the Prod-
uct-specific safety notes prior to performing service work
on the patient table. If the patient table power is switched off
for service work, always secure it against accidental
switch-on.

4. Feed in the tabletop plate and remove the tabletop covers (Tabletop covers (front and
rear) / p. 29).
Siemens, 2008 CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Definition / AS / Flash
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
PHS-2/PHS-3/PHS-4 Electronics 155
Page 155 of 354
Removing 0
1. Remove the PMM module (PMM Module / p. 151) and cut accessible cable ties.
Remove the plug through the slot in the tabletop. Any ties that cannot be accessed at
the moment can be cut later.
2. Move the tabletop to the position shown in the figure below.
Fig. 116: Position for removing the bracket
3. Remove the bracket for the PMM cable.
- Loosen the attachment screw at the rear (2/Fig. 117 / p. 155).
- Loosen the two screws on the bottom (1/Fig. 118 / p. 155)
Fig. 117: Attaching bracket
Pos. 1 Attaching bracket
Pos. 2 Attachment screw, rear
Fig. 118: View toward the bottom
Pos. 1 Attachment screws
156 PHS-2/PHS-3/PHS-4 Electronics
Definition / AS / Flash CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Siemens, 2008
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
Page 156 of 354
4. Release plug and flexible conduit.
5. Pull the cable and flexible conduit into the gantry.
Installation 0
1. Installation is the reverse of removal, ensure that the cable does not rub against any
part of the table.
2. Reinstall all covers.
Fig. 119: PMM cable removal
Cut cable tie and disconnect plug marked PMM (Item 1).
Unclip the flexible conduit from the mounting piece as shown (Item
2).
Fig. 120: PMM cable in gantry opening
The PMM cable and flexible conduit can now be pulled through to the
front of the table and laid in the gantry opening.
This provides access to the remaining cable ties under the tabletop
plate. Cut ties and remove cable from conduit.
Siemens, 2008 CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Definition / AS / Flash
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
PHS-2/PHS-3/PHS-4 Electronics 157
Page 157 of 354
Startup 0
Electrical
1. Switch on circuit breakers F2, F3, F5, F6, F7, and F11 in the PDC A and F2 in the PDC
B (not for Definition AS).
First switch the F2, F3, F5, F6 circuit breakers to the 0 position and then to the
1 position.
2. Switch the system to the SYSTEM/ON status at the control box.
Software
n.a.
Tune-up
n.a.
Tests
1. Perform a test scan
Final Steps 0
1. Clean.
158 PHS-2/PHS-3/PHS-4 Electronics
Definition / AS / Flash CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Siemens, 2008
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
Page 158 of 354
PMM cable (vertical lift) 4.12
The following instructions are applicable to:
- PMM cable vertical lift, material number 86 14 740
Prerequisites 0
Safety
WARNING
[ hz_serdoc_F13G01U12M03 ]
Avoid accident and injury or damage to parts.
Risk of accident and injury!
Read and observe the safety information contained in
the General section of this document and/or the
Product specific safety notes.
Time and manpower
1 person
Estimated total repair time: 1 hr.
Tools and Auxiliary Equipment
Standard service kit
Preliminary steps 0
1. Raise table to height of 125.
2. Switch system to COMP/ON at the control box.
3. Switch OFF the gantry/PHS power using service push-button S1 in the PDC.
Secure the circuit breakers that S1 switched OFF against unintended switch-on
(e.g. lock and tag).
NOTE Read and observe the safety information in the Prod-
uct-specific safety notes prior to performing service work
on the patient table. If the patient table power is switched off
for service work, always secure it against accidental
switch-on.

4. Release the telescopic covers (Telescopic covers: Releasing / p. 43).
5. Remove the electronics cover (Table electronics cover / p. 57).
6. Remove the telescopic covers (Telescopic covers: Removing / p. 52).
7. Remove the lower rear tabletop cover (Tabletop lower rear cover / p. 32).
Siemens, 2008 CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Definition / AS / Flash
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
PHS-2/PHS-3/PHS-4 Electronics 159
Page 159 of 354
8. Feed in the tabletop plate and remove the tabletop covers (Tabletop covers (front and
rear) / p. 29).
Removing 0
1. Release plug at electronics tray.
Fig. 121: PMM plug location
Release plug marked PMM (item 1) and cut cable ties up to vertical
flexible conduit.
Cut cable ties holding cables between horizontal and vertical flexible
conduits.
Pull the cable out of the vertical flexible conduit. Removal from this
point may involve partial withdrawal of the PHS cable set; refer to
instructions on replacement of PHS cable set (PHS Cable
Set / p. 162)
160 PHS-2/PHS-3/PHS-4 Electronics
Definition / AS / Flash CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Siemens, 2008
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
Page 160 of 354
2. Release plug at support end.
Installation 0
1. Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Prior to installing the cable ties, refer to
installing the PHS cable set (PHS Cable Set / p. 162)and follow instructions regarding
cable placement in the flexible conduit.
2. Reinstall all covers.
Fig. 122: PMM cable at support end
Cut cable ties, release plug marked PMM (Item 1), and feed plug
under support bridge (Item 2) <<Later models have removable post
in bridge>>.
Cable can now be pulled out of the tabletop support flexible conduit,
again refer to instructions on the replacement of PHS cable set (PHS
Cable Set / p. 162).
Siemens, 2008 CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Definition / AS / Flash
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
PHS-2/PHS-3/PHS-4 Electronics 161
Page 161 of 354
Startup 0
Electrical
1. Switch on circuit breakers F2, F3, F5, F6, F7, and F11 in the PDC A and F2 in the PDC
B (not for Definition AS).
First switch the F2, F3, F5, F6 circuit breakers to the 0 position and then to the
1 position.
2. Switch the system to the SYSTEM/ON status at the control box.
Software
n.a.
Tune-up
n.a.
Tests
1. Perform a test scan
Final Steps 0
1. Clean.
162 PHS-2/PHS-3/PHS-4 Electronics
Definition / AS / Flash CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Siemens, 2008
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
Page 162 of 354
PHS Cable Set 4.13
The following instructions are applicable to:
- PHS cable set PHS3 and PHS-4, material number 86 14 724
Prerequisites 0
Safety
WARNING
[ hz_serdoc_F13G01U12M03 ]
Avoid accident and injury or damage to parts.
Risk of accident and injury!
Read and observe the safety information contained in
the General section of this document and/or the
Product specific safety notes.
Time and manpower
1 person
Estimated total repair time: 1 1/2 hours.
Tools and Auxiliary Equipment
Standard service kit
Preliminary steps 0
1. Raise table to height of 125.
2. Switch system to COMP/ON at the control box.
3. Switch OFF the gantry/PHS power using service push-button S1 in the PDC.
Secure the circuit breakers that S1 switched OFF against unintended switch-on
(e.g. lock and tag).
NOTE Read and observe the safety information in the Prod-
uct-specific safety notes prior to performing service work
on the patient table. If the patient table power is switched off
for service work, always secure it against accidental
switch-on.

4. Release the telescopic covers (Telescopic covers: Releasing / p. 43).
5. Remove the electronics cover (Table electronics cover / p. 57).
6. Remove the telescopic covers (Telescopic covers: Removing / p. 52).
7. Remove the lower rear tabletop cover (Tabletop lower rear cover / p. 32).
Siemens, 2008 CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Definition / AS / Flash
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
PHS-2/PHS-3/PHS-4 Electronics 163
Page 163 of 354
8. Feed in the tabletop plate and remove the tabletop covers (Tabletop covers (front and
rear) / p. 29).
Removing 0
1. Starting at the electronics tray, work up towards the back of the table. Cut all cable ties
to release the PHS cables.
2. Remove plugs at electronics tray.
Fig. 123: Cable set connections at electronics tray
At the electronics tray, remove the following connectors:
- X712, X713, X714 at the electronics tray (item 1).
- X725 at the electronics tray (Item 2).
- X22 at the table master board (LMAS) (Item 3)
- PE connector (Item 4).
- The PMM cable is not included in the scope of delivery, but should
also be removed from the flexible conduits for ease of reinstalla-
tion. Refer to Replacement of Parts for vertical PMM cable (PMM
cable (vertical lift) / p. 158).
164 PHS-2/PHS-3/PHS-4 Electronics
Definition / AS / Flash CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Siemens, 2008
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
Page 164 of 354
3. Remove cables from vertical flexible conduit.
4. Remove the service panel plug.
Fig. 124: Removing cables from flexible conduit
Remove the cables by simply pulling them out of the vertical flexible
conduit.
Fig. 125: Cable set routing
Remove the service panel plug D704-X1.
Continue cutting cable ties.
Siemens, 2008 CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Definition / AS / Flash
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
PHS-2/PHS-3/PHS-4 Electronics 165
Page 165 of 354
5. Remove cables from horizontal flexible conduit.
Fig. 126: Removing support post and ground connectors
PMM cable tray removed for clarity.
Remove the support post (Item 1) (not included on early systems).
Remove PE connections (Item 2).
Pull cables from flexible conduit. At this point the PMM cable is also
partially removed, but will be reinstalled with the new cable set.
166 PHS-2/PHS-3/PHS-4 Electronics
Definition / AS / Flash CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Siemens, 2008
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
Page 166 of 354
6. Remove plugs at the back of the table.
7. Cut all cable ties and remove all cable clamps; the cable set can now be removed.
Installation 0
1. Lay the new cable in place, include the PMM cable and service panel cable, and make
sure the cables are parallel and not crossed. Then push them into the flexible conduits
until fully inserted and the plastic leaves have sprung back and are touching again.
2. Reconnect all plugs and ground connections, reinstall support post.
3. Replace cable ties. Ensure that cables in the flexible conduits are not to taught and
have sufficient freedom to flex fully. Check again that the cables in the flexible conduit
are parallel and do not cross each other.
4. Reinstall all covers.
Fig. 127: View from back, PHS cable loom replacement
At the back of the table, remove the following connectors:
- X5, X6 at one end of each motor controller.
- X1,X2 at the other end of each motor controller. At both controllers
also remove the 4 wires (to motor) from connector X2 pins 1, 3.
- X752 to back switchplate (Item 1).
- B721 and B731 to the horizontal motors (Item 2).
- PE connectors (item 3).
- Disconnect plug B722 to support sensor and B732 to top sensor.
Siemens, 2008 CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Definition / AS / Flash
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
PHS-2/PHS-3/PHS-4 Electronics 167
Page 167 of 354
Startup 0
Electrical
1. Switch on circuit breakers F2, F3, F5, F6, F7, and F11 in the PDC A and F2 in the PDC
B (not for Definition AS).
First switch the F2, F3, F5, F6 circuit breakers to the 0 position and then to the
1 position.
2. Switch the system to the SYSTEM/ON status at the control box.
Software
n.a.
Tune-up
n.a.
Tests
1. Perform a test scan
Final Steps 0
1. Clean.
168 PHS-1B Covers
Definition / AS / Flash CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Siemens, 2008
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
Page 168 of 354
5- 5PHS-1B Covers
Overview 0
Fig. 128: PHS-1B: Covers, rear view
Pos. 1 Tabletop
Pos. 2 Rubber bumper
Pos. 3 Back cover
Pos. 4 Back basin
Pos. 5 Bottom arc sheet
Pos. 6 Base cover
Pos. 7 Cover plates, right side (R1, R2, R3)
Pos. 8 Center cover
Pos. 9 Electronics cover
Siemens, 2008 CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Definition / AS / Flash
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
PHS-1B Covers 169
Page 169 of 354
Fig. 129: PHS-1B: Covers, front view
Pos. 1 Front cover
Pos. 2 Base cover
Covers described in this document:
Tabletop
Back cover
Back basin
Base cover
Center cover
Front cover
170 PHS-1B Covers
Definition / AS / Flash CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Siemens, 2008
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
Page 170 of 354
Tabletop 5.1
Prerequisites 0
Safety
WARNING
[ hz_serdoc_F13G01U12M03 ]
Avoid accident and injury or damage to parts.
Risk of accident and injury!
Read and observe the safety information contained in
the General section of this document and/or the
Product specific safety notes.
Time and manpower
1 person
Estimated total repair time: 1 hour
Tools and auxiliary equipment
Standard service kit
Preliminary Steps 0
1. Move the table into the uppermost position.
2. Move the tabletop into the gantry.
3. Switch system to the COMP/ON status at the control box.
4. Switch off the gantry/PHS power using the S1 service button in the PDC. Secure
against unintended switch-on the breakers that S1 switched off (e.g. lock and tag).
5. Remove the back cover and the back basin cover.
Siemens, 2008 CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Definition / AS / Flash
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
PHS-1B Covers 171
Page 171 of 354
Removal 0
1. Loosen the 16 screws (8 on each side) reachable from the bottom up.
Fig. 130: Attachment screws for tabletop (only one side shown)
2. Remove the tabletop from the carriage.
Installation 0
1. Install the tabletop in the reverse order.
NOTE Before tightening the attachment screws make sure that the
tabletop is aligned correctly.

Startup 0
Mechanical
1. Install the back basin cover.
Electrical
1. Switch on breakers F2, F3, F5, F6, F7, and F11 in the PDC.
First switch the F2, F3, F5, F6 breakers to the 0 position and then to the 1 posi-
tion.
2. Switch the system to the SYSTEM/ON status at the control box.
Software
n.a.
Tune-up
n.a.
172 PHS-1B Covers
Definition / AS / Flash CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Siemens, 2008
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
Page 172 of 354
Tests
1. First move the tabletop manually, then with the help of the service console.
2. Perform a test scan.
Final Steps 0
1. Clean.
Siemens, 2008 CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Definition / AS / Flash
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
PHS-1B Covers 173
Page 173 of 354
Back Basin, Center Cover, and Front Cover 5.2
Prerequisites 0
Safety
WARNING
[ hz_serdoc_F13G01U12M03 ]
Avoid accident and injury or damage to parts.
Risk of accident and injury!
Read and observe the safety information contained in
the General section of this document and/or the
Product specific safety notes.
Time and manpower
1 person
Estimated total repair time: 15 min.
Tools and auxiliary equipment
Standard service kit
Preliminary Steps 0
1. Move the table into the uppermost position.
2. Switch system to the COMP/ON status at the control box.
3. Switch off the gantry/PHS power using the S1 service button in the PDC. Secure
against unintended switch-on the breakers that S1 switched off (e.g. lock and tag).
Removal 0
Back basin
NOTE For easier removal of the back basin it is recommended to
remove the back cover first.

1. Loosen the 4 attachment screws from below
2. Remove the back basin
174 PHS-1B Covers
Definition / AS / Flash CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Siemens, 2008
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
Page 174 of 354
Center cover
1. Remove the back basin
2. Remove the 2 attachment screws at the rear of the center cover
3. Remove the 2 attachment screws at the front of the center cover
4. Move the center cover to the back and remove it.
Front cover
Installation 0
1. The installation is performed in the reverse order.
Startup 0
Electrical
1. Switch on breakers F2, F3, F5, F6, F7, and F11 in the PDC.
First switch the F2, F3, F5, F6 breakers to the 0 position and then to the 1 posi-
tion.
2. Switch the system to the SYSTEM/ON status at the control box.
Software
n.a.
Tune-up
n.a.
Fig. 131: Front cover
Pos. 1 Attachment screws
1. Remove the 2 attachment screws at
the front of the front cover.
2. Remove the 4 attachment screws at
the bottom of the front cover.
3. Move the cover approximately 2 cm
to the front.
4. First push down on one side of the
cover.
5. Subsequently push the other side
down and remove the cover.
Siemens, 2008 CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Definition / AS / Flash
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
PHS-1B Covers 175
Page 175 of 354
Tests
1. Check the movement of the table via the service keypad.
2. Perform a test scan.
Final Steps 0
1. Clean.
176 PHS-1B Covers
Definition / AS / Flash CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Siemens, 2008
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
Page 176 of 354
Base Cover, Electronics Cover 5.3
Prerequisites 0
Safety
WARNING
[ hz_serdoc_F13G01U12M03 ]
Avoid accident and injury or damage to parts.
Risk of accident and injury!
Read and observe the safety information contained in
the General section of this document and/or the
Product specific safety notes.
Time and manpower
1 person
Estimated total repair time: 15 min.
Tools and auxiliary equipment
Standard service kit
Preliminary Steps 0
1. Move the table into the uppermost position.
2. Switch system to the COMP/ON status at the control box.
3. Switch off the gantry/PHS power using the S1 service button in the PDC. Secure
against unintended switch-on the breakers that S1 switched off (e.g. lock and tag).
Siemens, 2008 CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Definition / AS / Flash
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
PHS-1B Covers 177
Page 177 of 354
Removal 0
Base cover (left and right side)
Fig. 132: Base cover
Pos. 1 Attachment screws
Loosen the 4 attachment screws on
the left and right side of the base
cover.
Fig. 133: Base cover - front view
Pos. 1 Attachment screws
Fig. 134: Base cover - rear view
Pos. 1 Attachment screws
Loosen the 2 attachment screws on
the front and back of the base cover.
Remove both base covers.
178 PHS-1B Covers
Definition / AS / Flash CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Siemens, 2008
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
Page 178 of 354
Electronics cover
Installation 0
1. The installation is performed in the reverse order.
NOTE When installing the bottom covers, make sure that the cas-
tors of the bottom arc sheet are on top of the bottom cover
guides (see arrow).

Fig. 136: Bottom arc sheet
Startup 0
Electrical
1. Switch on breakers F2, F3, F5, F6, F7, and F11 in the PDC.
First switch the F2, F3, F5, F6 breakers to the 0 position and then to the 1 posi-
tion.
2. Switch the system to the SYSTEM/ON status at the control box.
Fig. 135: Electronics cover - attachment screws,
left side
1. Remove the left and right base cov-
ers
2. Loosen the 2 attachment screws on
both sides of the electronics cover
3. Remove the electronics cover.
Siemens, 2008 CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Definition / AS / Flash
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
PHS-1B Covers 179
Page 179 of 354
Software
n.a.
Tune-up
n.a.
Tests
1. Check the movement of the table via the service keypad.
2. Perform a test scan.
Final Steps 0
1. Clean.
180 PHS-1B Mechanical and Electronic
Definition / AS / Flash CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Siemens, 2008
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
Page 180 of 354
6- 6PHS-1B Mechanical and Electronic
Overview 0
This chapter describes the removal and replacement of the following components:
Boards within the electronics tray
Horizontal drive assembly
Horizontal drive belt
Vertical encoder
Wire sensor
Vertical drive
Siemens, 2008 CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Definition / AS / Flash
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
PHS-1B Mechanical and Electronic 181
Page 181 of 354
Fig. 137: Electronics tray
Pos. 1 Power supply
Pos. 2 Vertical controller
Pos. 3 Power supply
Pos. 4 LMAS-3
Pos. 5 Fuses
Pos. 6 Rectifier
Pos. 7 Contactor
Fig. 138: PHS-1B: Foot components
Pos. 1 Vertical drive unit
Pos. 2 Gas spring unit
Pos. 3 Encoder
Pos. 4 Brake resistor
Pos. 5 Service keypad (D704)
Fig. 139: Components for horizontal movement,
top view
Pos. 1 Horizontal drive assembly
Pos. 2 Horizontal drive belt
Fig. 140: Components for horizontal
movement, front
Pos. 1 Castors
Pos. 2 Wire sensor (B732)
Pos. 3 Horizontal drive assembly
Pos. 4 Horizontal drive belt
Pos. 5 Horizontal controller
182 PHS-1B Mechanical and Electronic
Definition / AS / Flash CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Siemens, 2008
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
Page 182 of 354
Boards within the Electronics Tray 6.1
Prerequisites 0
Safety
WARNING
[ hz_serdoc_F13G01U12M03 ]
Avoid accident and injury or damage to parts.
Risk of accident and injury!
Read and observe the safety information contained in
the General section of this document and/or the
Product specific safety notes.
Time and manpower
1 person
Estimated total repair time: 1 hr.
Tools and auxiliary equipment
Standard service kit
Preliminary Steps 0
1. Move the table into the uppermost position.
2. Move the tabletop into the gantry.
3. Switch system to the COMP/ON status at the control box.
4. Switch off the gantry/PHS power using the S1 service button in the PDC. Secure
against unintended switch-on the breakers that S1 switched off (e.g. lock and tag).
5. Remove the cover of the electronics tray.
Removal 0
1. Remove all cable connections of the component which has to be replaced:
2. Loosen the attachment screws of the component which has to be replaced.
3. Take out the component.
Siemens, 2008 CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Definition / AS / Flash
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
PHS-1B Mechanical and Electronic 183
Page 183 of 354
Installation 0
1. Install the new component in the reverse order.
Startup 0
Electrical
1. Switch on breakers F2, F3, F5, F6, F7, and F11 in the PDC.
First switch the F2, F3, F5, F6 breakers to the 0 position and then to the 1 posi-
tion.
2. Switch the system to the SYSTEM/ON status at the control box.
Software
n.a.
Tune-up
For LMAS-3 or motor controller only::
Select: FRU Replacement
Select: PHS - LMAS (for the LMAS-3)
or
Select: PHS - Motor controller hor./vert. (for vertical motor controller).
Press <Go> to start the tour.
The Auto_Complete is started and checks which adjustments are required.
Follow the instructions of the Auto_Complete routine.
Tests
1. Check the function of the table.
2. Perform a test scan
Final Steps 0
1. Clean.
184 PHS-1B Mechanical and Electronic
Definition / AS / Flash CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Siemens, 2008
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
Page 184 of 354
Horizontal Drive Assembly 6.2
Prerequisites 0
Safety
WARNING
[ hz_serdoc_F13G01U12M03 ]
Avoid accident and injury or damage to parts.
Risk of accident and injury!
Read and observe the safety information contained in
the General section of this document and/or the
Product specific safety notes.
Time and manpower
1 person
Estimated total repair time: 1 hr.
Tools and auxiliary equipment
Standard service kit
Preliminary Steps 0
1. Move the table into the uppermost position.
2. Switch system to the COMP/ON status at the control box.
3. Switch off the gantry/PHS power using the S1 service button in the PDC. Secure
against unintended switch-on the breakers that S1 switched off (e.g. lock and tag).
4. Remove the back basin.
5. Remove the front cover
6. Move the tabletop manually into the gantry.
7. Remove the rear tabletop cover (this is required for the adjustment of the belt tension).
Removal 0
NOTE The horizontal drive assembly spare part is delivered as a
preassembled component consisting of the motor, clutch,
and pulley.

1. Cut the cable ties of the cables to the drive motor and the clutch.
2. Remove the cable connections of the horizontal drive on the motor controller.
Siemens, 2008 CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Definition / AS / Flash
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
PHS-1B Mechanical and Electronic 185
Page 185 of 354
3. Disconnect the cable connection of the clutch.
Fig. 141: Clutch and wire sensor
Pos. 1 Clutch
Pos. 2 Cable connection of clutch
Pos. 3 Wire sensor
Pos. 4 Cable connection of wire sensor
4. Disconnect the cable connection of the wire sensor.
5. Disconnect the wire of the wire sensor.
6. Release the tension of the toothed belt (Removal / p. 188).
a) Loosen the locknut.
b) Loosen the 2 attachment screws from below.
c) Release the belt tension by turning the adjustment screw counterclockwise.
Fig. 142: Wire of the wire sensor
Pos. 1 Wire
Pos. 2 Locknut
Pos. 3 Fastening nut
Loosen the locknut.
Remove the fastening nut.
Remove the wire from the attachment
bracket.
Note: Carefully hold the sensor
wire with one hand when installing
it at the brass assembly.
Do not let the sensor wire retract in
an uncontrolled manner
Sudden retraction of the wire into
the sensor will destroy the sensor!
186 PHS-1B Mechanical and Electronic
Definition / AS / Flash CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Siemens, 2008
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
Page 186 of 354
7. Open the screws for the belt clamp and remove belt from the drive pulley.
Fig. 145: Belt clamp
Pos. 1 Screws for belt clamp
8. Loosen the 4 attachment screws and remove the horizontal drive assembly
Fig. 146: Attachment screws of horizontal drive assembly
9. Remove the wire sensor from the old drive assembly (3 attachment screws)
(Fig. 152 / p. 193).
Fig. 143: Belt tension adjuster - view from top
Pos. 1 Locknut
Pos. 2 Adjustment screw
Fig. 144: Belt tension adjuster - view from
below
Pos. 1 Attachment screws
Siemens, 2008 CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Definition / AS / Flash
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
PHS-1B Mechanical and Electronic 187
Page 187 of 354
Installation 0
1. Install the wire sensor on the new drive assembly.
2. Install the horizontal drive assembly.
3. Install the belt and adjust the belt tension according to (Installation / p. 190).
NOTE The frequency measured with the belt tension meter has to
be 39 + 2 Hz.

4. Connect the cables for the motor, the wire sensor, and the clutch.
5. Secure the cables with the cable ties.
6. Install all covers.
Startup 0
Electrical
1. Switch on breakers F2, F3, F5, F6, F7, and F11 in the PDC.
First switch the F2, F3, F5, F6 breakers to the 0 position and then to the 1 posi-
tion.
2. Switch the system to the SYSTEM/ON status at the control box.
Software
n.a.
Tune-up
n.a.
Tests
1. Check the horizontal movement of the tabletop via the buttons at the gantry control pan-
els.
2. Perform a test scan
Final Steps 0
1. Clean.
188 PHS-1B Mechanical and Electronic
Definition / AS / Flash CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Siemens, 2008
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
Page 188 of 354
Tabletop Drive Belt 6.3
Prerequisites 0
Safety
WARNING
[ hz_serdoc_F13G01U12M03 ]
Avoid accident and injury or damage to parts.
Risk of accident and injury!
Read and observe the safety information contained in
the General section of this document and/or the
Product specific safety notes.
Time and manpower
1 person
Estimated total repair time: 1.5 hours.
Tools and auxiliary equipment
Standard service kit
Belt tension meter, refer to SPC for the material number.
Preliminary Steps 0
1. Move the table into the uppermost position.
2. Move the tabletop into the gantry.
3. Switch system to the COMP/ON status at the control box.
4. Switch off the gantry/PHS power using the S1 service button in the PDC. Secure
against unintended switch-on the breakers that S1 switched off (e.g. lock and tag).
5. Remove the front covers.
6. Remove the back cover.
7. Remove the rear tabletop cover.
Removal 0
1. Release the tension of the toothed belt
a) Loosen the locknut.
b) Loosen the 2 attachment screws from below.
c) Release the belt tension by turning the adjustment screw counterclockwise.
Siemens, 2008 CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Definition / AS / Flash
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
PHS-1B Mechanical and Electronic 189
Page 189 of 354
2. Open the screws for the belt clamp and remove the belt.
Fig. 149: Belt clamp
Pos. 1 Screws for belt clamp
Fig. 147: Belt tension adjuster - view from top
Pos. 1 Locknut
Pos. 2 Adjustment screw
Fig. 148: Belt tension adjuster - view from
below
Pos. 1 Attachment screws
190 PHS-1B Mechanical and Electronic
Definition / AS / Flash CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Siemens, 2008
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
Page 190 of 354
Installation 0
1. Perform the installation in the reverse order.
2. Measuring the belt tension using the belt tension meter:
The measurement has to be performed from above.
Push the tabletop towards the gantry until you achieve a distance of 600 mm between
the center of the rear pulley and the belt clamp.
Place the sensor of the belt tension meter at the center of the trim length (= 300 mm
from rear pulley) over the flat side of the belt. The distance between the sensor of the
belt tension meter and the belt should be about 5 to 20 mm.
Fig. 150: Measuring the belt tension
Pos. 1 Rear pulley
Pos. 2 Belt clamp
Pos. 3 Measuring point
To learn how to use the tension meter, see the operating instructions delivered with the
meter.
- Start belt vibration by hitting it with the head of a screwdriver.
- Perform the measurement.
- The resonance frequency must be 45 +2 Hz for correct belt tension.
NOTE The value 45 +2 Hz is only valid when the belt is replaced.
When using the same belt, e.g. after replacement of the hori-
zontal motor, the tension has to be adjusted to 39 +2 Hz.

3. Adjust the belt tension
- Adjust the belt tension with the adjusting screw
- Repeat measurement.
- Adjust until the required frequency is reached.
- Secure the attachment screws.
4. Install all covers.
Siemens, 2008 CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Definition / AS / Flash
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
PHS-1B Mechanical and Electronic 191
Page 191 of 354
Startup 0
Electrical
1. Switch on breakers F2, F3, F5, F6, F7, and F11 in the PDC.
First switch the F2, F3, F5, F6 breakers to the 0 position and then to the 1 posi-
tion.
2. Switch the system to the SYSTEM/ON status at the control box.
Software
n.a.
Tune-up
n.a.
Tests
1. Check the horizontal movement of the tabletop via the buttons at the gantry control pan-
els.
2. Perform a test scan
Final Steps 0
1. Clean.
192 PHS-1B Mechanical and Electronic
Definition / AS / Flash CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Siemens, 2008
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
Page 192 of 354
Tabletop Position Wire Sensor B732 6.4
Prerequisites 0
Safety
WARNING
[ hz_serdoc_F13G01U12M03 ]
Avoid accident and injury or damage to parts.
Risk of accident and injury!
Read and observe the safety information contained in
the General section of this document and/or the
Product specific safety notes.
Time and manpower
1 person
Estimated total repair time: 1 hour.
Tools and auxiliary equipment
Standard service kit
Preliminary Steps 0
1. Move the table into the uppermost position.
2. Switch system to the COMP/ON status at the control box.
3. Switch off the gantry/PHS power using the S1 service button in the PDC. Secure
against unintended switch-on the breakers that S1 switched off (e.g. lock and tag).
4. Remove the front cover
5. Move the tabletop manually into the gantry.
Siemens, 2008 CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Definition / AS / Flash
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
PHS-1B Mechanical and Electronic 193
Page 193 of 354
Removal 0
1. Disconnect the connection cable of the wire sensor:
2. Remove the sensor wire.
3. Loosen the 3 attachment nuts and remove the sensor:
Fig. 152: Wire positioning sensor - attachment nuts and screws
Installation 0
NOTE Carefully hold the sensor wire with one hand when installing
it at the brass assembly.
Do not let the sensor wire retract in an uncontrolled manner.
Sudden retraction of the wire into the sensor will destroy the
sensor!

T 1. Install sensor with the 3 attachment nuts.
2. Draw the sensor wire out and attach the end to the bracket with the nut.
Fig. 151: Wire positioning sensor - removing the
wire
Pos. 1 Locking nut
Pos. 2 Attachment nut
Loosen the locking nut of the wire
(No. 1).
Remove the attachment nut (No. 2).
Remove the wire from the holding
bracket
194 PHS-1B Mechanical and Electronic
Definition / AS / Flash CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Siemens, 2008
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
Page 194 of 354
3. Secure the sensor wire accordingly with the locking nut.
4. Reinstall all covers.
Startup 0
Electrical
1. Switch on breakers F2, F3, F5, F6, F7, and F11 in the PDC.
First switch the F2, F3, F5, F6 breakers to the 0 position and then to the 1 posi-
tion.
2. Switch the system to the SYSTEM/ON status at the control box.
Software
n.a.
Tune-up
Select: Local_Service > Tune-up
Select: FRU Replacement
Select: PHS - Encoder
Press <Go> to start the tour.
The Auto_Complete is started and checks which adjustments are required.
Follow the instructions of the Auto_Complete routine.
Tests
1. Check the horizontal movement of the tabletop via the buttons at the gantry control pan-
els.
2. Check the horizontal position display at the gantry display and/or control monitor.
3. Perform a test scan
Final Steps 0
1. Clean.
Siemens, 2008 CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Definition / AS / Flash
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
PHS-1B Mechanical and Electronic 195
Page 195 of 354
Vertical Drive 6.5
Prerequisites 0
Safety
WARNING
[ hz_serdoc_F13G01U12M03 ]
Avoid accident and injury or damage to parts.
Risk of accident and injury!
Read and observe the safety information contained in
the General section of this document and/or the
Product specific safety notes.
Time and manpower
1 person
Estimated total repair time: 3 hours.
Tools and auxiliary equipment
Standard service kit
Parts included in the spare parts delivery
Preliminary Steps 0
1. Move the table into the uppermost position. If necessary use the emergency crank.
2. Switch system to the COMP/ON status at the control box.
3. Switch off the gantry/PHS power using the S1 service button in the PDC. Secure
against unintended switch-on the breakers that S1 switched off (e.g. lock and tag).
4. Remove all table base covers, center cover, and the left/right fin cover assembly.
196 PHS-1B Mechanical and Electronic
Definition / AS / Flash CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Siemens, 2008
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
Page 196 of 354
Removal 0
1. Insert the two stop bolts (delivered with the spare part) in the front of the table base on
both the left and right sides and secure them with adhesive tape. If necessary, use the
emergency crank to adjust the height of the tabletop
NOTE The stop bolts must be inserted completely and secured cor-
rectly; otherwise, injuries may result.

2. Lower the table with the emergency crank until the safety bolts are under load.
3. Open the electrical connections X1, X2 and release the corresponding sockets from the
socket strip.
4. Disconnect the ground cables from the motor and X1 at the ground pin.
5. Cut all corresponding cable ties and disconnect the cable on the encoder.
6. Remove the split pin on the upper part of the spindle.
7. Using a punch and a hammer, remove the bolt from the spindle attachment.
Fig. 155: Upper spindle attachment
8. Rotate the spindle shaft clockwise to shorten it about 20 mm.
9. Remove the split pin on the lower part of the spindle.
Fig. 153: Location for the safety bolt
Pos. 1 Insert one safety bolt into this hole and secure
it with adhensive tape
Fig. 154: Secure the safety bolt with adhensive
tape
Siemens, 2008 CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Definition / AS / Flash
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
PHS-1B Mechanical and Electronic 197
Page 197 of 354
10. Using a punch and a hammer, remove the bolt from the spindle attachment.
11. Remove the old vertical drive.
12. Remove the encoder from the old vertical drive.
Installation 0
NOTE When installing the new vertical drive, use the new split pins
delivered with the spare part.

1. Change the white plastic gear from the old vertical drive to the new one.
2. Install the encoder from the old drive to the new one.
3. Rotate the spindle shaft counterclockwise toward the mechanical end position and then
back again by 180 degrees.
4. Place the new vertical drive on the lower spindle attachment and install the 14 mm bolt
from the left to the right side.
5. Secure the bolt with new split pins.
6. Install the 12 mm bolt. If necessary, adjust the spindle height by rotating the spindle
shaft or by pushing the tabletop slightly upward.
7. Secure the bolt with new split pins.
8. Connect all cables and secure them with cable ties.
9. Remove the two stop bolts. If necessary, lift the table a little with the emergency crank.
Startup 0
Electrical
1. Switch on breakers F2, F3, F5, F6, F7, and F11 in the PDC.
First switch the F2, F3, F5, F6 breakers to the 0 position and then to the 1 posi-
tion.
2. Switch the system to the SYSTEM/ON status at the control box.
Software
n.a.
Tune-up
Select: Local_Service > TuneUp
Select: FRU Replace
Select: PHS - Encoder
198 PHS-1B Mechanical and Electronic
Definition / AS / Flash CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Siemens, 2008
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
Page 198 of 354
Press <Go> to start the tour.
The Auto_Complete is started and checks which adjustments are required.
Follow the instructions of the Auto_Complete routine.
Tests
1. Perform a test scan
Final Steps 0
1. Clean.
Siemens, 2008 CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Definition / AS / Flash
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
PHS-1B Mechanical and Electronic 199
Page 199 of 354
Vertical Position Sensor B711 6.6
Prerequisites 0
Safety
WARNING
[ hz_serdoc_F13G01U12M03 ]
Avoid accident and injury or damage to parts.
Risk of accident and injury!
Read and observe the safety information contained in
the General section of this document and/or the
Product specific safety notes.
Time and manpower
1 person
Estimated total repair time: 1 hr.
Tools and auxiliary equipment
Standard service kit
Preliminary Steps 0
1. Move the table into the uppermost position.
2. Move the tabletop into the gantry.
3. Switch system to the COMP/ON status at the control box.
4. Switch off the gantry/PHS power using the S1 service button in the PDC. Secure
against unintended switch-on the breakers that S1 switched off (e.g. lock and tag).
Removal 0
1. Cut all cable ties of the cable to the vertical sensor.
2. Disconnect the cable on the vertical sensor.
200 PHS-1B Mechanical and Electronic
Definition / AS / Flash CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Siemens, 2008
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
Page 200 of 354
3. Removing the sensor:
Installation 0
1. Install the encoder in the reverse order.
Startup 0
Electrical
1. Switch on breakers F2, F3, F5, F6, F7, and F11 in the PDC.
First switch the F2, F3, F5, F6 breakers to the 0 position and then to the 1 posi-
tion.
2. Switch the system to the SYSTEM/ON status at the control box.
Software
n.a.
Tune-up
Select: Local_Service > Tune-up
Select: FRU Replacement
Select: PHS - Encoder
Press <Go> to start the tour.
The Auto_Complete is started and checks which adjustments are required.
Follow the instructions of the Auto_Complete routine.
Fig. 156: Vertical encoder
Pos. 1 Shaft clamp
Pos. 2 Attachment screw
Loosen the screw on the shaft clamp.
Remove the attachment screw.
Pull the sensor out from the drive.
Siemens, 2008 CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Definition / AS / Flash
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
PHS-1B Mechanical and Electronic 201
Page 201 of 354
Tests
1. Check the vertical table movement and check the display for the vertical position at the
gantry display.
2. Perform a test scan
Final Steps 0
1. Clean.
202 PHS-1B Mechanical and Electronic
Definition / AS / Flash CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Siemens, 2008
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
Page 202 of 354
Vertical Microswitches 6.7
Prerequisites 0
Safety
WARNING
[ hz_serdoc_F13G01U12M03 ]
Avoid accident and injury or damage to parts.
Risk of accident and injury!
Read and observe the safety information contained in
the General section of this document and/or the
Product specific safety notes.
Time and manpower
1 person
Estimated total repair time: 1 hr.
Tools and auxiliary equipment
Standard service kit
Preliminary Steps 0
1. Move the table into the uppermost position.
2. Move the tabletop into the gantry.
3. Switch system to the COMP/ON status at the control box.
4. Switch off the gantry/PHS power using the S1 service button in the PDC. Secure
against unintended switch-on the breakers that S1 switched off (e.g. lock and tag).
5. Remove the base covers.
6. Remove the right cover plates.
Removal 0
1. Disconnect the cables on the switch which has to be replaced.
2. Remove the 2 attachment screws.
Siemens, 2008 CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Definition / AS / Flash
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
PHS-1B Mechanical and Electronic 203
Page 203 of 354
NOTE Do not loosen the attachment screws of the metal block
where the switches are installed. Otherwise the switches
have to be adjusted.

Fig. 157: Vertical limit switches
Installation 0
1. Installation is in reverse order of removal.
Startup 0
Electrical
1. Switch on circuit breakers F2, F3, F5, F6, F7, and F11 in the PDC A and F2 in the PDC
B (not for Definition AS).
First switch the F2, F3, F5, F6 circuit breakers to the 0 position and then to the
1 position.
2. Switch the system to the SYSTEM/ON status at the control box.
Software
n.a.
Tune-up
n.a.
Tests
1. Check the vertical table movement via the buttons at the gantry control panels.
2. Perform a test scan
204 PHS-1B Mechanical and Electronic
Definition / AS / Flash CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Siemens, 2008
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
Page 204 of 354
Final Steps 0
1. Clean.
Siemens, 2008 CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Definition / AS / Flash
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
MPT/MPT-2 covers 205
Page 205 of 354
7- 7MPT/MPT-2 covers
Overview 0
This chapter describes the removal and replacement of the PHS covers.
The following instructions are applicable to:
MPT, material number 8098225
MPT-2, material number 8097102
Fig. 158: MPT: Overview of covers
Pos. 1 Telescopic covers (left/right)
Pos. 2 Switchplate cover
Pos. 3 Side support (left/right)
Pos. 4 Rear covers (left/right)
Pos. 5 Front covers (left/right)
Pos. 6 Handle / PMM box
Covers described in this document.
Tabletop covers (front and rear): (not shown) These are the covers underneath the
tabletop plate covering the support. They must be removed to gain access to the hori-
zontal drive motors, tabletop belt, horizontal sensors, and horizontal controllers.
Telescopic covers: (Item 1) The telescopic covers are divided into 4 segment pairs:
- Top cover (left/right) = top segment
- Upper telescopic cover (left/right) = upper middle segment
- Lower telescopic cover (left/right) = lower middle segment
- Foot cover (left/right) = base segment
206 MPT/MPT-2 covers
Definition / AS / Flash CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Siemens, 2008
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
Page 206 of 354
The whole cover assembly can be released at the tabletop and lowered to the table
base for certain service operations at the tabletop and/or for complete removal.
For most service operations at the table base, the whole cover assembly can be
released at the bottom (foot covers) and lifted with the help of a service tool (adjustable
strap with two hooks) to gain access to all components (e.g. electronics, vertical drive
etc.) in the table base.
Switchplate cover (Item 2) This cover must be removed to gain access to the switch-
plate and the horizontal drive motors and belts.
Side support. (Item 3) These are the aluminum covers on each side of the tabletop
plate. They are normally only removed if damaged.
Rear-end covers (Item 4) These are at each foot end of the side support covers.
NOTE: Both covers (left/right) are loosely mounted together in the middle. For removal
both covers must be removed.
Front-end covers. (Item 5) These are at each front end (gantry side) of the side sup-
port covers.
Handle / PMM box. (Item 6) This cover at the foot end of the tabletop sled incorporates
the handle bar for manual tabletop movement. If the system has the PMM option
installed then this cover represents the PMM box (including the PMM electronics and
terminals).
NOTE: For Replacement of Parts refer to section MPT Electronics - PMM Box (PMM
Box / p. 331)
Siemens, 2008 CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Definition / AS / Flash
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
MPT/MPT-2 covers 207
Page 207 of 354
Important information for attachment of foot and top covers 7.1
The foot and top covers, left and right, are attached using pins and grommets as well as
screws. Six grommets (three on each side) are for the foot covers and two grommets are
for the top covers. The pins lock into the grommets.
NOTE Before installing these covers, carefully check the grommets,
especially those between the foot switches, and replace any
that are damaged.
After the covers are installed, check the function of the foot
switches.
A set of 50 grommets (these are called "rubber couplings" in
the SPC) is delivered with the system. They can also be
ordered under the material number 10092130.

Fig. 159: Grommets, foot side Fig. 160: Grommets, gantry side
208 MPT/MPT-2 covers
Definition / AS / Flash CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Siemens, 2008
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
Page 208 of 354
Fig. 161: Grommet between the foot switches Fig. 162: Grommets for top covers (gantry
side)
Fig. 163: Brass pin on cover Fig. 164: Example of a damaged grommet
Siemens, 2008 CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Definition / AS / Flash
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
MPT/MPT-2 covers 209
Page 209 of 354
Tabletop covers (front and rear) 7.2
The following instructions are applicable to:
- Front tabletop cover, material number 86 18 360
- Rear tabletop cover, material number 86 18 378
Prerequisites 0
Safety
WARNING
[ hz_serdoc_F13G01U12M03 ]
Avoid accident and injury or damage to parts.
Risk of accident and injury!
Read and observe the safety information contained in
the General section of this document and/or the
Product specific safety notes.
Time and Manpower
1 person
Estimated total repair time: 10 min.
Tools and auxiliary equipment
Standard service kit
Preliminary steps 0
1. Raise the patient table to maximum height (position 125) via the service buttons or, if
not possible, via the mechanical lift.
2. Switch system to COMP/ON at the control box.
3. Switch OFF the gantry/PHS power using service push-button S1 in the PDC.
Secure the circuit breakers that S1 switched OFF against unintended switch-on
(e.g. lock and tag).
NOTE Read and observe the safety information in the Prod-
uct-specific safety notes prior to performing service work
on the patient table. If the patient table power is switched off
for service work, always secure it against accidental
switch-on.

For rear tabletop cover:
Move the tabletop plate toward the gantry until all six mounting screws are accessible.
210 MPT/MPT-2 covers
Definition / AS / Flash CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Siemens, 2008
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
Page 210 of 354
Remove the rear covers of the side support. (Front and rear covers (left/right) / p. 220)
For front tabletop cover:
Move the tabletop plate all the way back toward the foot end of the table.
Remove the tabletop plate. (Tabletop plate / p. 238)
Remove the front covers of the side support. (Front and rear covers (left/right) / p. 220)
Removing 0
1. Removing the rear tabletop cover:
Fig. 165: MPT: Tabletop cover (rear)
Pos. 1 Mounting screws and plastic caps
Remove the 6 plastic caps from the mounting holes (item 1).
Remove the 6 mounting screws (item 1).
Remove the cover by sliding it out to the rear.
Siemens, 2008 CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Definition / AS / Flash
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
MPT/MPT-2 covers 211
Page 211 of 354
2. Removing the front tabletop cover:
Installation 0
1. Reinstall the covers and secure them with the mounting screws.
2. Install the plastic caps over the 6 mounting holes.
3. Reinstall the end covers of the side support.
Startup 0
Electrical
1. Switch on circuit breakers F2, F3, F5, F6, F7, and F11 in the PDC A and F2 in the PDC
B (not for Definition AS).
First switch the F2, F3, F5, F6 circuit breakers to the 0 position and then to the
1 position.
2. Switch the system to the SYSTEM/ON status at the control box.
Software
n.a
Fig. 166: MPT: Tabletop cover (front)
Pos. 1 Mounting screws and plastic caps
Pos. 2 Mounting screws (front)
Remove the 6 plastic caps (item 1).
Remove the 6 mounting screws (item 1).
Remove the two cover screws at the front end of the cover (item 2).
Remove the cover by sliding it out to the front.
212 MPT/MPT-2 covers
Definition / AS / Flash CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Siemens, 2008
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
Page 212 of 354
Tune-up
n.a
Tests
1. Check all patient table movements (horizontal and vertical).
2. Perform a test scan.
Final Steps 0
1. Clean.
Siemens, 2008 CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Definition / AS / Flash
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
MPT/MPT-2 covers 213
Page 213 of 354
Switchplate cover 7.3
The following instruction is applicable for:
- Switchplate cover, material number 86 18 238
Prerequisites 0
Safety
WARNING
[ hz_serdoc_F13G01U12M03 ]
Avoid accident and injury or damage to parts.
Risk of accident and injury!
Read and observe the safety information contained in
the General section of this document and/or the
Product specific safety notes.
Time and Manpower
1 person
Estimated total repair time: 10 min.
Tools and auxiliary equipment
Standard service kit
Preliminary steps 0
1. Raise the patient table to maximum height (position 125) via the service buttons or, if
not possible, via the mechanical lift.
2. Switch system to COMP/ON at the control box.
3. Switch OFF the gantry/PHS power using service push-button S1 in the PDC.
Secure the circuit breakers that S1 switched OFF against unintended switch-on
(e.g. lock and tag).
NOTE Read and observe the safety information in the Prod-
uct-specific safety notes prior to performing service work
on the patient table. If the patient table power is switched off
for service work, always secure it against accidental
switch-on.

214 MPT/MPT-2 covers
Definition / AS / Flash CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Siemens, 2008
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
Page 214 of 354
Removing 0
1. Removing the switchplate cover.
Fig. 167: MPT: Switchplate cover
Pos. 1 Mounting screws
Remove the two cover mounting screws (item 1).
Remove the cover by sliding it off toward the foot end of the table (see
arrow).
Siemens, 2008 CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Definition / AS / Flash
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
MPT/MPT-2 covers 215
Page 215 of 354
Installation 0
1. Installing/reinstalling the cover:
Startup 0
Electrical
1. Switch on circuit breakers F2, F3, F5, F6, F7, and F11 in the PDC A and F2 in the PDC
B (not for Definition AS).
First switch the F2, F3, F5, F6 circuit breakers to the 0 position and then to the
1 position.
2. Switch the system to the SYSTEM/ON status at the control box.
Software
n.a.
Tune-up
n.a.
Fig. 168: MPT: Switchplate cover mounting
Pos. 1 Holding pin (at cover)
Pos. 2 Guide rail (at tabletop)
Slide the cover onto the tabletop plate until the two holding pins
(item1) feed into the guide rail (item 2) at both sides of the tabletop
plate.
Hold the rear of the cover and install the two cover mounting screws.
216 MPT/MPT-2 covers
Definition / AS / Flash CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Siemens, 2008
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
Page 216 of 354
Tests
1. Check the proper function of the switchplate.
Pushing the cover must release manual tabletop movement.
Releasing the cover must block manual tabletop movement.
2. Perform a test scan.
Final Steps 0
1. Clean.
Siemens, 2008 CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Definition / AS / Flash
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
MPT/MPT-2 covers 217
Page 217 of 354
Side support (left/right) 7.4
The following instruction is applicable for:
- Side support cover (left/right), material number 86 18 188
Prerequisites 0
Safety
WARNING
[ hz_serdoc_F13G01U12M03 ]
Avoid accident and injury or damage to parts.
Risk of accident and injury!
Read and observe the safety information contained in
the General section of this document and/or the
Product specific safety notes.
Time and Manpower
1 person
Estimated total repair time: 30 min.
Tools and auxiliary equipment
Standard service kit
Preliminary steps 0
1. Raise the patient table to maximum height (position 125) via the service buttons or, if
not possible, via the mechanical lift.
2. Switch system to COMP/ON at the control box.
3. Switch OFF the gantry/PHS power using service push-button S1 in the PDC.
Secure the circuit breakers that S1 switched OFF against unintended switch-on
(e.g. lock and tag).
NOTE Read and observe the safety information in the Prod-
uct-specific safety notes prior to performing service work
on the patient table. If the patient table power is switched off
for service work, always secure it against accidental
switch-on.

4. Remove the rear covers of the side support. (Front and rear covers (left/right) / p. 220)
5. Remove the tabletop plate. (Tabletop plate / p. 238)
6. Remove the front covers of the side support. (Front and rear covers (left/right) / p. 220)
218 MPT/MPT-2 covers
Definition / AS / Flash CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Siemens, 2008
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
Page 218 of 354
Removing 0
1. Removing the side support covers:
Installation 0
1. Lift the new side support cover onto the tabletop and align it with the mounting holes.
2. Install all accessible mounting screws and tighten accordingly.
3. Move the tabletop sled accordingly to access the remaining mounting holes.
Fig. 169: MPT: Side support covers
Pos. 1 Mounting screws (4 of 6)
Fig. 170: MPT: Side support cover
Pos. 1 Mounting screws (remaining 2 of 6)
Remove all accessible mounting screws (item 1).
Move the tabletop sled in the other direction to access the remaining
mounting screws.
Remove the remaining mounting screws
Carefully lift off the side support cover and remove it.
Siemens, 2008 CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Definition / AS / Flash
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
MPT/MPT-2 covers 219
Page 219 of 354
4. Install the remaining mounting screws and tighten accordingly.
5. Reinstall the front covers of the side support.
6. Reinstall the rear covers of the side support.
7. Reinstall the tabletop plate.
Startup 0
Electrical
1. Switch on circuit breakers F2, F3, F5, F6, F7, and F11 in the PDC A and F2 in the PDC
B (not for Definition AS).
First switch the F2, F3, F5, F6 circuit breakers to the 0 position and then to the
1 position.
2. Switch the system to the SYSTEM/ON status at the control box.
Software
n.a.
Tune-up
n.a.
Tests
1. Check all table movements (horizontal and vertical).
2. Perform a test scan.
Final Steps 0
1. Clean.
220 MPT/MPT-2 covers
Definition / AS / Flash CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Siemens, 2008
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
Page 220 of 354
Front and rear covers (left/right) 7.5
The following instructions are applicable to:
- Front cover left, material number 86 18 204
- Front cover right, material number 86 18 196
- Rear cover left, material number 86 18 220
- Rear cover right, material number 86 18 212
Prerequisites 0
Safety
WARNING
[ hz_serdoc_F13G01U12M03 ]
Avoid accident and injury or damage to parts.
Risk of accident and injury!
Read and observe the safety information contained in
the General section of this document and/or the
Product specific safety notes.
Time and Manpower
1 person
Estimated total repair time: 15 min.
Tools and auxiliary equipment
Standard service kit
Preliminary steps 0
1. Raise the patient table to maximum height (position 125) via the service buttons or, if
not possible, via the mechanical lift.
2. Switch system to COMP/ON at the control box.
3. Switch OFF the gantry/PHS power using service push-button S1 in the PDC.
Secure the circuit breakers that S1 switched OFF against unintended switch-on
(e.g. lock and tag).
NOTE Read and observe the safety information in the Prod-
uct-specific safety notes prior to performing service work
on the patient table. If the patient table power is switched off
for service work, always secure it against accidental
switch-on.

Siemens, 2008 CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Definition / AS / Flash
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
MPT/MPT-2 covers 221
Page 221 of 354
Removing 0
1. Removing the rear covers of the side support:
Fig. 171: MPT: Rear covers (side support)
Pos. 1 Mounting screws and plastic caps
Remove the two plastic caps and mounting screws (item 1).
Lift off both covers at the same time by pulling them off.
NOTE: Both covers are loosely mounted together in the middle to
balance certain table tolerances.
222 MPT/MPT-2 covers
Definition / AS / Flash CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Siemens, 2008
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
Page 222 of 354
2. Removing the front covers of the side support:
Installation 0
1. Refit covers and install the mounting screws and plastic caps accordingly.
Startup 0
Electrical
1. Switch on circuit breakers F2, F3, F5, F6, F7, and F11 in the PDC A and F2 in the PDC
B (not for Definition AS).
First switch the F2, F3, F5, F6 circuit breakers to the 0 position and then to the
1 position.
2. Switch the system to the SYSTEM/ON status at the control box.
Software
n.a.
Tune-up
n.a.
Fig. 172: MPT: Front covers (side support)
Pos. 1 Mounting screws and plastic caps
Pos. 2 Support wheels
Remove the tabletop plate for easier removal of the covers.
Remove the two plastic caps and mounting screws (item 1).
Remove the cover by pulling it over the support wheel and off to the
front (see arrow).
NOTE: If the tabletop plate was not removed it must be lifted slightly
to enable the cover to be pulled over the support wheel (item 2).
Siemens, 2008 CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Definition / AS / Flash
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
MPT/MPT-2 covers 223
Page 223 of 354
Tests
1. Check all table movements (horizontal and vertical).
2. Perform a test scan.
Final Steps 0
1. Clean.
224 MPT/MPT-2 covers
Definition / AS / Flash CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Siemens, 2008
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
Page 224 of 354
Telescopic Covers: Releasing & Raising 7.6
The following instructions are applicable to:
- Top cover (left), material number 86 16 337
- Top cover (right), material number 86 18 329
- Upper telescopic cover (left/right), material number 86 18 352
- Lower telescopic cover (left/right), material number 86 18 345
- Foot cover (left), material number 86 16 311
- Foot cover (right), material number 86 16 303
This procedure is relevant if access to the electronic components in the table base is
required.
Prerequisites 0
Safety
WARNING
[ hz_serdoc_F13G01U12M03 ]
Avoid accident and injury or damage to parts.
Risk of accident and injury!
Read and observe the safety information contained in
the General section of this document and/or the
Product specific safety notes.
Time and Manpower
1 person
Estimated total repair time: 15 min.
Tools and auxiliary equipment
Standard service kit
Preliminary steps 0
1. If possible, lower the patient table to minimum height via the service buttons.
2. Switch system to COMP/ON at the control box.
3. Switch OFF the gantry/PHS power using service push-button S1 in the PDC.
Secure the circuit breakers that S1 switched OFF against unintended switch-on
(e.g. lock and tag).
Siemens, 2008 CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Definition / AS / Flash
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
MPT/MPT-2 covers 225
Page 225 of 354
NOTE Read and observe the safety information in the Prod-
uct-specific safety notes prior to performing service work
on the patient table. If the patient table power is switched off
for service work, always secure it against accidental
switch-on.

Removing 0
1. Releasing the base covers from the table base:
2. Installing the service strap:
NOTE The required strap is delivered with the MPT as a service aid.

Fig. 173: MPT: Telescopic covers
Pos. 1 Locking screw
Remove the locking screw at the foot end of the base covers (Item 1).
Pull up the base cover by hand to release the bolts from the grom-
mets at the table base. Each base cover half-segment (left/right) has
three bolts (one between the two foot switches and one each at the
foot end and the front).
226 MPT/MPT-2 covers
Definition / AS / Flash CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Siemens, 2008
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
Page 226 of 354
3. Lifting the telescopic covers:
Fig. 174: MPT: Telescopic covers (lifting)
Pos. 1 Strap (service aid delivered with MPT)
Pos. 2 Strap mounting location
Pos. 3 Fastener
Loop the service strap around the cover bar between the two foot
switches (Item 2) and across the tabletop to the other side.
Feed the end of the strap into the fastener (item 3) and tighten the
strap.
Fig. 175: MPT: Telescopic covers (raised)
Pos. 1 Service switches
Raise the table via the service switches to maximum table position.
In this position full access to the electronic components at the table
base is available.
Siemens, 2008 CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Definition / AS / Flash
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
MPT/MPT-2 covers 227
Page 227 of 354
Installation 0
1. Lower the table to minimum position.
2. Release the strap and remove it.
3. Push the base covers down onto the table base by hand until the bolts are pushed into
the grommets.
4. Install the locking screw at the foot end of the base cover to secure the telescopic cov-
ers.
Startup 0
Electrical
1. Switch on circuit breakers F2, F3, F5, F6, F7, and F11 in the PDC A and F2 in the PDC
B (not for Definition AS).
First switch the F2, F3, F5, F6 circuit breakers to the 0 position and then to the
1 position.
2. Switch the system to the SYSTEM/ON status at the control box.
Software
n.a.
Tune-up
n.a.
Tests
1. Raise and lower table to check that covers are not rubbing against one another and
causing a squeaking noise.
2. Perform a test scan.
Final Steps 0
1. Clean.
228 MPT/MPT-2 covers
Definition / AS / Flash CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Siemens, 2008
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
Page 228 of 354
Telescopic Covers: Lowering & Removing 7.7
The following instructions are applicable to:
- Top cover (left), material number 86 16 337
- Top cover (right), material number 86 18 329
- Upper telescopic cover (left/right), material number 86 18 352
- Lower telescopic cover (left/right), material number 86 18 345
- Foot cover (left), material number 86 16 311
- Foot cover (right), material number 86 16 303
Prerequisites 0
Safety
WARNING
[ hz_serdoc_F13G01U12M03 ]
Avoid accident and injury or damage to parts.
Risk of accident and injury!
Read and observe the safety information contained in
the General section of this document and/or the
Product specific safety notes.
Time and Manpower
1 person
Estimated total repair time: 30 min.
Tools and auxiliary equipment
Standard service kit
Preliminary steps 0
1. If possible, lower the patient table to minimum height via the service buttons.
2. Switch system to COMP/ON at the control box.
3. Switch OFF the gantry/PHS power using service push-button S1 in the PDC.
Secure the circuit breakers that S1 switched OFF against unintended switch-on
(e.g. lock and tag).
NOTE Read and observe the safety information in the Prod-
uct-specific safety notes prior to performing service work
on the patient table. If the patient table power is switched off
for service work, always secure it against accidental
switch-on.

Siemens, 2008 CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Definition / AS / Flash
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
MPT/MPT-2 covers 229
Page 229 of 354
Removing 0
1. Removing the cover screws:
Fig. 176: MPT: Top cover (gantry-side)
Pos. 1 Cover screws
Pos. 2 Mounting screws
Remove the two cover screws (item 1) at the gantry side of the top
cover.
Fig. 177: MPT: Top cover (foot-end side)
Pos. 1 Cover screws
Pos. 2 Mounting screws
Remove the cover screws (item 1) at the foot-end side of the top
cover.
230 MPT/MPT-2 covers
Definition / AS / Flash CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Siemens, 2008
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
Page 230 of 354
2. Removing the mounting screws:
Fig. 178: MPT: Top cover (gantry-side)
Pos. 1 Cover screws
Pos. 2 Mounting screws
Remove the two plastic caps and mounting screws (item 2) at the
gantry side of the top cover.
Fig. 179: MPT: Top cover (foot-end side)
Pos. 1 Cover screws
Pos. 2 Mounting screws
Remove the two plastic caps and mounting screws (item 2) at the
foot-end side of the top cover.
Siemens, 2008 CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Definition / AS / Flash
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
MPT/MPT-2 covers 231
Page 231 of 354
3. Removing the top cover from the tabletop:
Fig. 180: MPT: Top cover (gantry-side)
Pos. 1 Top cover (right half-shell)
Pos. 2 Bolt & grommet locations
Pull down the top cover at the gantry side until the two bolts are
released from the grommets. (item 2 and arrow)
Hold on to the cover and step to the right side of the table.
Fig. 181: MPT: Top cover (foot-end side)
Pos. 1 Top cover (right half-shell)
Pos. 2 Pin and keyway locations
Slightly lift the right half-shell of the top cover at the foot end of the
table to release the pin at the keyway (item 2) and pull it toward the
side of the table to unhook and remove it. (see arrow)
Remove the left half-shell of the top cover the same way from the
other side of the table.
232 MPT/MPT-2 covers
Definition / AS / Flash CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Siemens, 2008
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
Page 232 of 354
4. Removing the upper and lower telescopic cover segments.
Fig. 182: MPT: Telescopic cover segments
Pos. 1 Cover screws
The upper and lower telescopic cover segments are held in place by 2
cover screws at the front and 2 at the rear (Item 1).
Remove each pair of covers in turn, starting with the top pair.
NOTE: To prevent the half-shells from falling down when removing
the cover screws, secure the segments with some tape.
Fig. 183: MPT: Telescopic covers (removal)
Pos. 1 Tape (to secure cover segments)
Mark the segments upper / lower to identify them during reassem-
bly.
Siemens, 2008 CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Definition / AS / Flash
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
MPT/MPT-2 covers 233
Page 233 of 354
5. Removing the foot cover segment.
Installation 0
1. Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
2. Telescopic covers (lower and upper) must be installed with the larger lip toward the top.
Startup 0
Electrical
1. Switch on circuit breakers F2, F3, F5, F6, F7, and F11 in the PDC A and F2 in the PDC
B (not for Definition AS).
First switch the F2, F3, F5, F6 circuit breakers to the 0 position and then to the
1 position.
2. Switch the system to the SYSTEM/ON status at the control box.
Software
n.a.
Fig. 184: MPT: Foot cover (right)
Pos. 1 Locking screw
Pos. 2 Cover screws
Pos. 3 Bolts
Remove the locking screw at the foot-end side of the foot covers
(Item 1).
Remove the two cover screws at the front and rear (item 2).
Pull up each foot cover half-shell by hand to release the cover bolts
(item 3) from the grommets at the table base. .
Remove both foot cover segments.
234 MPT/MPT-2 covers
Definition / AS / Flash CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Siemens, 2008
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
Page 234 of 354
Tune-up
n.a.
Tests
1. Raise and lower table to check that covers are not rubbing against one another and
causing a squeaking noise.
2. Perform a test scan.
Final Steps 0
1. Clean.
Siemens, 2008 CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Definition / AS / Flash
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
MPT/MPT-2 Mechanical 235
Page 235 of 354
8- 8MPT/MPT-2 Mechanical
Overview 0
This chapter describes the removal and replacement of the following MPT mechanical
components:
Tabletop plates (Standard, RTP, and Bariatric type plates)
Vertical drive unit
Horizontal drive motors (tabletop and top support drive motor)
Horizontal drive belts (tabletop and top support drive belt)
Position sensors (tabletop wire sensor, top support magnetic sensor, and vertical
position sensor)
Vertical safety and limit switches (upper and lower limit switches and vertical con-
nect safety switch)
NOTE The safety nut switch on the vertical drive is NOT an FRU!
If the safety nut switch is activated the complete vertical
drive must be replaced!

NOTE The adjustment procedures for parts that require software
calibration will be covered by the FRU Replacement proce-
dure under Local Service > Tune-up.

236 MPT/MPT-2 Mechanical
Definition / AS / Flash CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Siemens, 2008
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
Page 236 of 354
Fig. 185: MPT: Vertical drive and tabletop plate
Pos. 1 Vertical drive
Pos. 2 Tabletop plate
Fig. 186: MPT: Horizontal motors and belts
Pos. 1 Tabletop motor and belt
Pos. 2 Top support motor and belt
Fig. 187: MPT: Vertical position sensor
Pos. 1 Vertical drive (rear)
Pos. 2 Vertical position sensor
Fig. 188: MPT: Wire sensor (horizontal
position)
Pos. 1 Wire sensor
Siemens, 2008 CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Definition / AS / Flash
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
MPT/MPT-2 Mechanical 237
Page 237 of 354
Fig. 189: MPT: Magnetic sensor (top support
position)
Pos. 1 Magnetic sensor
Fig. 190: MPT: Magnetic band (top support
position)
Pos. 1 Magnetic band
Fig. 191: MPT: Vertical safety limit switches
Pos. 1 Upper limit switch
Pos. 2 Lower limit switch
Fig. 192: MPT: Connect safety switch (vertical
drive)
Pos. 1 Connect safety switch
238 MPT/MPT-2 Mechanical
Definition / AS / Flash CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Siemens, 2008
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
Page 238 of 354
Tabletop plate 8.1
The following instructions are applicable to:
- MPT standard tabletop, material number 86 18 170
- MPT RTP tabletop, material number 86 18 162
- MPT bariatric tabletop, material number 86 18 154
NOTE The Multi-Purpose Table (MPT) has removable tabletops.
Exchange/replacement does not require any tools.
The replacement procedure is identical for all tabletop plate
types.

NOTE The RTP and Bariatric tabletop plates are optional accesso-
ries and therefore cannot be ordered via the Spare Parts Cat-
alog.
They have to be ordered through sales channels!

Fig. 193: MPT: Tabletop plate types
Pos. 1 Standard type tabletop plate
Pos. 2 Bariatric / RPT type tabletop plate
Siemens, 2008 CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Definition / AS / Flash
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
MPT/MPT-2 Mechanical 239
Page 239 of 354
Prerequisites 0
Safety
WARNING
[ hz_serdoc_F13G01U12M03 ]
Avoid accident and injury or damage to parts.
Risk of accident and injury!
Read and observe the safety information contained in
the General section of this document and/or the
Product specific safety notes.
Time and Manpower
1 person
Estimated total repair time: less than 2 minutes.
Tools and auxiliary equipment
None
Preliminary steps 0
1. Raise the patient table to a convenient height (e.g. position 125).
2. Move the tabletop all the way back toward the foot end of the table.
240 MPT/MPT-2 Mechanical
Definition / AS / Flash CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Siemens, 2008
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
Page 240 of 354
Removing 0
1. Remove/exchange the tabletop plate.
Fig. 194: MPT: Tabletop plate exchange mechanism
Pos. 1 Sliding mechanism (mechanical interface)
Pos. 2 Foot-end cover of tabletop
Lift the tabletop plate at the gantry-side approx. 30 cm (1 ft.) and pull
it toward the gantry to the mechanical stop.
The plate will be lifted up by the sliding mechanism at the foot
end.
Lower the tabletop plate back onto the table at the gantry-side.
Step to the side of the patient table and grab the tabletop on both
sides about 80 cm (2.5 feet) from the foot end.
In this location the tabletop weight is balanced for easier lifting and
removal.
Lift off the tabletop and carefully lower the foot-end side of the plate
to the floor.
Siemens, 2008 CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Definition / AS / Flash
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
MPT/MPT-2 Mechanical 241
Page 241 of 354
Installation 0
1. Check the coding screws at the new tabletop plate:
2. Lift the new tabletop onto the table and position it on the tabletop so that the aluminum
block of the tabletop plate sits on the sliding mechanism (mechanical interface) of the
tabletop.
3. Lift the tabletop at the gantry side approx. 30 cm (1 ft.) and push it toward the foot end of
the table until it slides fully down the sliding mechanism and reaches a mechanical stop.
4. Lower the tabletop plate at the gantry-side onto the tabletop.
The tabletop plate is automatically secured to the tabletop by the 2 locking pins
and the sliding mechanism.
Startup 0
Mechanical
n.a.
Fig. 195: MPT: Tabletop plate (mechanical interface)
Pos. 1 Coding screws
Pos. 2 Locking pins
Pos. 3 Guide pins (for sliding mechanism)
Check the coding screws at the mechanical interface (item 1) of the
old tabletop plate and compare with the new plate.
If necessary adjust the coding at the new plate by moving the coding
screw to the corresponding locations.
242 MPT/MPT-2 Mechanical
Definition / AS / Flash CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Siemens, 2008
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
Page 242 of 354
Software
n.a
NOTE The tabletop plate and plate type will be recognized automat-
ically by the software through the coding switches at the
tabletop sled.
If incorrect or invalid coding (e.g. tabletop plate missing, cod-
ing screws in incorrect location or not activating the switch)
is recognized, the table will not go into standby and table
movement will be blocked.

Tune-up
n.a
Tests
1. Check horizontal movements of the tabletop via the buttons at the gantry control panel.
2. Perform a test scan
Fig. 196: MPT: Coding switches at tabletop sled (for plate identification)
Pos. 1 Tabletop sled
Pos. 2 Coding switches
Pos. 3 Holes for locking pins of tabletop plate
Siemens, 2008 CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Definition / AS / Flash
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
MPT/MPT-2 Mechanical 243
Page 243 of 354
Final Steps 0
1. Clean.
244 MPT/MPT-2 Mechanical
Definition / AS / Flash CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Siemens, 2008
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
Page 244 of 354
Vertical drive 8.2
The following instructions are applicable to:
- PHS vertical drive, material number 86 14 294
Prerequisites 0
Safety
WARNING
[ hz_serdoc_F13G01U12M03 ]
Avoid accident and injury or damage to parts.
Risk of accident and injury!
Read and observe the safety information contained in
the General section of this document and/or the
Product specific safety notes.
Time and Manpower
1 person
Estimated total repair time: 2 hr.
Tools and auxiliary equipment
Standard service kit
Loctite 243
Size 10 hex nut socket (for manual lift)
Mallet
Preliminary steps 0
1. Raise the patient table to maximum height (position 125) via the service buttons or, if
not possible, via the mechanical lift.
2. Switch system to COMP/ON at the control box.
3. Switch OFF the gantry/PHS power using service push-button S1 in the PDC.
Secure the circuit breakers that S1 switched OFF against unintended switch-on
(e.g. lock and tag).
NOTE Read and observe the safety information in the Prod-
uct-specific safety notes prior to performing service work
on the patient table. If the patient table power is switched off
for service work, always secure it against accidental
switch-on.

Siemens, 2008 CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Definition / AS / Flash
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
MPT/MPT-2 Mechanical 245
Page 245 of 354
4. Remove the telescopic covers of the patient table. (Telescopic Covers: Lowering &
Removing / p. 228)
Removing 0
1. Remove the following cable connections:
- U711.X7 at the vertical motor controller.
- U711.X3 at the vertical motor controller.
- U711.X1, wires U,V,W, and PE at the vertical motor controller.
- M700.X711 at the electronics tray.
- Cut all necessary cable ties to release the motor cables.
2. Disconnect the microswitch (safety nut switch S717) at the vertical drive.
Fig. 197: MPT: Safety switches (vertical drive)
Pos. 1 Mounting bracket (connect safety switch)
Pos. 2 Safety nut switch
Remove the bracket (2 screws) of the connect safety switch S718
and lay aside (Item 1).
Remove the wires S717SC, S717C from the safety nut switch S717
(Item 2).
246 MPT/MPT-2 Mechanical
Definition / AS / Flash CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Siemens, 2008
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
Page 246 of 354
3. Install the vertical safety bolts.
Fig. 198: MPT: Vertical safety bolts
Pos. 1 Storage position
Pos. 2 Vertical lock position
Remove the safety bolts from storage position (Item 1).
Install the bolts at the vertical lock position (Item 2).
Siemens, 2008 CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Definition / AS / Flash
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
MPT/MPT-2 Mechanical 247
Page 247 of 354
4. Lower the patient table onto the vertical safety bolts.
Fig. 199: MPT: Vertical drive
Pos. 1 Mounting screws
Pos. 2 Manual lift bolt
Lower the patient table by turning the manual lift bolt (item 2) coun-
terclockwise until the tabletop weight is taken by the vertical safety
bolts (use a wrench with a size 10 hex nut)
Continue lowering the tabletop until the bottom of the drive rises off
1-2 mm from the table base plate.
Remove the 3 securing bolts (Item 1).
Note: It is normal that the screw heads are approximately 8 mm high
to allow some freedom of vertical movement for the drive (in case of
mechanical blocking of the tabletop, e.g. during lowering).
248 MPT/MPT-2 Mechanical
Definition / AS / Flash CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Siemens, 2008
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
Page 248 of 354
5. Remove the cross brace locating screws.
Fig. 200: MPT: Cross brace & shaft locking pin (vertical drive)
Pos. 1 Locking screws (cross brace)
Pos. 2 Locating screws (cross brace)
Pos. 3 Locking screws (shaft pin)
Pos. 4 Shaft pin
Remove the 2 locking screws (Item 1) at the cross brace.
( 4mm Allen key)
Remove the 2 cross brace locating screws (Item 2).
( 12mm Allen key)
Siemens, 2008 CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Definition / AS / Flash
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
MPT/MPT-2 Mechanical 249
Page 249 of 354
6. Remove the cross brace.
Fig. 201: Removing vertical drive
Pull on the cross brace to remove it from the scissors and lift out the
drive.
If there is any difficulty, use a mallet to assist with removing the cross
brace.
250 MPT/MPT-2 Mechanical
Definition / AS / Flash CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Siemens, 2008
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
Page 250 of 354
7. Remove the shaft pin.
Installation 0
1. Install the cross brace onto the new drive, insert the shaft pin, and tighten the 2 locking
screws of the shaft pin. Rotate the cross brace to obtain the approximate height for rein-
stallation. Fine adjustments can be made with the manual lift screw.
2. Place the drive in position and push the cross brace into place between the scissors;
again, use a mallet if necessary.
T 3. Install the cross brace locating screws, tighten them to 130 Nm, and install the 2 locking
screws with torque of 18.6 Nm.
4. Use the manual lift screw to lower the drive motor (clockwise) until it almost touches the
base plate and install the 3 locating screws applying Loctite 243, leaving 8 mm between
the head and the drive motor flange.
5. Continue to turn clockwise to raise the table until the safety bolts can be removed. Rein-
stall them in the storage positions.
6. Reinstall the bracket of the connect safety switch S718 to the table base and adjust the
switch to the switch flag on the new vertical drive.
Refer to adjustment instructions for the connect safety switch.
7. Reinstall all plugs and wires to original configuration. Use cable ties as necessary.
8. Reinstall the table covers.
Fig. 202: Shaft locking pin
Remove the 2 locking screws (item 1) and withdraw the pin (Item 2).
Lift off the cross brace.
Siemens, 2008 CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Definition / AS / Flash
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
MPT/MPT-2 Mechanical 251
Page 251 of 354
Startup 0
Electrical
1. Switch on circuit breakers F2, F3, F5, F6, F7, and F11 in the PDC A and F2 in the PDC
B (not for Definition AS).
First switch the F2, F3, F5, F6 circuit breakers to the 0 position and then to the
1 position.
2. Switch the system to the SYSTEM/ON status at the control box.
Software
n.a.
Tune-up
Select: Local_Service > Tune-up
Select: FRU Replacement
Select: PHS - Encoder
Press <Go> to start the tour.
The Auto_Complete is started and checks which adjustments are required.
Follow the instructions of the Auto_Complete routine.
Tests
1. Check the vertical table movement via the buttons at the gantry control panels and
check the vertical position at the gantry display.
2. Perform a test scan
Final Steps 0
1. Clean.
252 MPT/MPT-2 Mechanical
Definition / AS / Flash CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Siemens, 2008
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
Page 252 of 354
Horizontal drive, tabletop 8.3
The following instructions are applicable to:
- PHS Horizontal drive motor, material number 86 14 344 (MPT) and 86 18 386
(MPT-2)
NOTE The horizontal drive is delivered as a set with the drive pulley
and the jaw spanner. We recommend replacing the drive pul-
ley together with the motor.

Prerequisites 0
Safety
WARNING
[ hz_serdoc_F13G01U12M03 ]
Avoid accident and injury or damage to parts.
Risk of accident and injury!
Read and observe the safety information contained in
the General section of this document and/or the
Product specific safety notes.
Time and Manpower
1 person
Estimated total repair time: 1 hr.
Tools and auxiliary equipment
Standard service kit
Preliminary steps 0
1. Raise the patient table to maximum height (position 125).
2. Switch system to COMP/ON at the control box.
3. Switch OFF the gantry/PHS power using service push-button S1 in the PDC.
Secure the circuit breakers that S1 switched OFF against unintended switch-on
(e.g. lock and tag).
Siemens, 2008 CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Definition / AS / Flash
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
MPT/MPT-2 Mechanical 253
Page 253 of 354
NOTE Read and observe the safety information in the Prod-
uct-specific safety notes prior to performing service work
on the patient table. If the patient table power is switched off
for service work, always secure it against accidental
switch-on.

4. Remove the tabletop plate. (Tabletop plate / p. 238)
5. Remove the left/right rear covers of the side support (one plastic cap and screw each
side).
6. Feed the tabletop sled towards the gantry to access all 6 mounting screws of the rear
tabletop cover.
7. Remove the rear tabletop cover (6 plastic caps and Allen screws). (Tabletop covers
(front and rear) / p. 209)
8. Remove the switchplate cover at the foot end of the tabletop. (Switchplate
cover / p. 213)
254 MPT/MPT-2 Mechanical
Definition / AS / Flash CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Siemens, 2008
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
Page 254 of 354
Removing 0
1. Remove the cable connections:
Siemens, 2008 CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Definition / AS / Flash
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
MPT/MPT-2 Mechanical 255
Page 255 of 354
256 MPT/MPT-2 Mechanical
Definition / AS / Flash CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Siemens, 2008
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
Page 256 of 354
For MPT only:
Fig. 203: MPT: Horizontal motor controller (tabletop/top support)
Pos. 1 Tabletop controller U731
Pos. 2 Top support controller U721
Pos. 3 Connectors X731/X721 (to motor assembly)
Remove the connector X3 from the motor controller U731 (item 1).
Remove the connector X2 from the corresponding motor controller
and remove the 2 wires to the drive motor from pins 1 and 3 (= motor
brake connection).
Disconnect the cable connection X731 (item3)
Cut all cable ties and remove cable clamp (shielding of orange cable)
to release all cables to the drive motor.
For MPT-2 only:
Fig. 204: MPT-2: View from below
Disconnect the cables on the horizontal drive.
Siemens, 2008 CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Definition / AS / Flash
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
MPT/MPT-2 Mechanical 257
Page 257 of 354
2. Remove the tabletop belt adjuster (at the foot end of the tabletop):
3. Remove the drive pulley.
Fig. 205: MPT: Tabletop belt tension adjuster
Pos. 1 Adjustment screw
Pos. 2 Mounting/Locking screws
Release the belt tension adjustment screw (item 1).
Remove the 2 locking screws holding the adjuster block (item 2).
Remove the belt tension adjuster.
Fig. 206: MPT: Pulley mounting (tabletop drive)
Pos. 1 Pulley mounting screw
Pos. 2 Pulley
Open the pulley mounting screw (item 1)
Feed the belt downwards from the pulley (see arrow) to form a loop.
Remove the pulley (item 2) from the drive by pulling it off.
If the pulley cannot be removed by hand, a small screwdriver can be
used to assist.
258 MPT/MPT-2 Mechanical
Definition / AS / Flash CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Siemens, 2008
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
Page 258 of 354
4. Remove the drive.
Installation 0
T 1. Install the drive motor and secure with 4 screws/nuts.
For MPT: Tighten to 3 Nm.
For MPT-2: Tighten to 5 Nm
2. Reconnect all cables in the reverse direction as described above.
3. Push the drive pulley onto the motor shaft together with the jaw spanner
(Fig. 53 / p. 72).
Fig. 207: Drive motor securing screws - PHS-2, PHS-3, MPT
Fig. 208: Drive motor (table top) securing screws - PHS-4, MPT-2
Remove the 4 drive mounting screws/nuts (Item 1).
Hold the drive when removing the screws to prevent dropping.
Remove the drive motor.
Siemens, 2008 CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Definition / AS / Flash
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
MPT/MPT-2 Mechanical 259
Page 259 of 354
NOTE The jaw spanner will be used
1. as a spacer between the drive pulley and the motor box
2. as opposite support

T 4. Fasten the drive pulley with the following torque:
MPT: 35 Nm
MPT-2: 65 Nm
(Fig. 50 / p. 70)
5. Reinstall the belt adjuster; check that the drive belt is located properly in both pulleys.
6. Adjust the drive belt tension to 52 +2 Hz using the belt tension meter. The procedure is
described in (Installation / p. 277).
7. Reinstall all covers.
Startup 0
Electrical
1. Switch on circuit breakers F2, F3, F5, F6, F7, and F11 in the PDC A and F2 in the PDC
B (not for Definition AS).
First switch the F2, F3, F5, F6 circuit breakers to the 0 position and then to the
1 position.
2. Switch the system to the SYSTEM/ON status at the control box.
Software
n.a
Tune-up
n.a.
Tests
1. Check the horizontal movement of the tabletop via the buttons at the gantry control pan-
els.
2. Perform a test scan
Final Steps 0
1. Clean.
260 MPT/MPT-2 Mechanical
Definition / AS / Flash CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Siemens, 2008
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
Page 260 of 354
Horizontal drive, top support 8.4
The following instructions are applicable to:
- PHS horizontal drive motor, material number 86 18 394
NOTE The horizontal drive is delivered as a set with the drive pulley
and the jaw spanner. We recommend replacing the drive pul-
ley together with the motor.

Prerequisites 0
Safety
WARNING
[ hz_serdoc_F13G01U12M03 ]
Avoid accident and injury or damage to parts.
Risk of accident and injury!
Read and observe the safety information contained in
the General section of this document and/or the
Product specific safety notes.
Time and Manpower
1 person
Estimated total repair time: 45 min.
Tools and auxiliary equipment
Standard service kit
Loctite 243
Preliminary steps 0
1. Raise the patient table to maximum height (position 125).
2. Switch system to COMP/ON at the control box.
3. Switch OFF the gantry/PHS power using service push-button S1 in the PDC.
Secure the circuit breakers that S1 switched OFF against unintended switch-on
(e.g. lock and tag).
NOTE Read and observe the safety information in the Prod-
uct-specific safety notes prior to performing service work
on the patient table. If the patient table power is switched off
for service work, always secure it against accidental
switch-on.

Siemens, 2008 CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Definition / AS / Flash
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
MPT/MPT-2 Mechanical 261
Page 261 of 354
4. Remove the switchplate cover at the foot end of the tabletop. (Switchplate
cover / p. 213)
5. Lower the telescopic covers of the table to the table base. (Telescopic Covers: Lower-
ing & Removing / p. 228)
6. Move the tabletop towards the gantry.
7. Remove the rear plastic cover under the tabletop. (Tabletop covers (front and
rear) / p. 209)
Removing 0
1. Remove the cable connections at the motor controller:
Fig. 209: MPT: Horizontal motor controller (tabletop/top support)
Pos. 1 Tabletop controller U731
Pos. 2 Top support controller U721
Pos. 3 Connectors X731/X721 (to motor assembly)
Remove connector X3 from the motor controller U721 (item 2).
Remove connector X2 from the corresponding motor controller and
remove the 2 wires from X2.pin 1 and X2.pin 3 (= motor brake con-
nection).
Disconnect connector X732 (item 3).
Cut all cable ties and remove cable clamp (shielding of orange cable)
to release all cables to the drive motor.
262 MPT/MPT-2 Mechanical
Definition / AS / Flash CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Siemens, 2008
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
Page 262 of 354
2. Remove the belt adjuster.
Fig. 210: MPT: Belt adjuster (top support)
Pos. 1 Locking nut
Pos. 2 Clamping screw
Pos. 3 Adjustment screw
Release the locking nut (item 1).
Loosen clamping screw (Item 2).
Release the adjustment screw to release tension on the belt.
Remove the clamping screw (item 2) and remove the belt adjuster
from the tabletop.
Siemens, 2008 CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Definition / AS / Flash
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
MPT/MPT-2 Mechanical 263
Page 263 of 354
3. Remove the pulley from the drive.
4. Remove the drive motor.
Fig. 211: MPT: Pulley mounting (top support drive)
Pos. 1 Pulley mounting screw
Pos. 2 Pulley
Open the pulley mounting screw (item 1)
Remove the belt from the pulley and pull the pulley (item 2) off the
drive shaft.
If the pulley cannot be removed by hand, a small screwdriver can be
used to assist.
Fig. 212: Drive motor securing screws
Remove the 4 drive mounting screws (Item 1).
Hold the drive when removing the screws to prevent dropping.
Remove the drive motor.
264 MPT/MPT-2 Mechanical
Definition / AS / Flash CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Siemens, 2008
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
Page 264 of 354
Installation 0
T 1. Install the drive motor and secure with 4 screws. Tighten to 3 Nm.
2. Route the green and orange cables of the new drive to motor controller U721 accord-
ingly.
3. Install the two wires from the orange cable into connector X2 (pins 1 and 3) and con-
nect X2 at the motor controller U721.
4. Connect X3 at motor controller U721 and secure the shielding of the orange cable with
the clamp.
5. Connect the green cable to connector X732 (located between the motor controllers)
6. Push the drive pulley onto the motor shaft together with the jaw spanner.
NOTE The jaw spanner will be used
1. as a spacer between the drive pulley and the motor box
2. as opposite support

7. Fasten the drive pulley with the torque of 35 Nm
8. Install the drive belt over the pulley.
9. Reinstall the belt adjuster; check that the drive belt is located properly in both pulleys.
10. Adjust the support drive belt to 70 +2 Hz using the belt tension meter. The procedure is
described in (Installation / p. 95).
11. Reinstall all table covers.
Startup 0
Electrical
1. Switch on circuit breakers F2, F3, F5, F6, F7, and F11 in the PDC A and F2 in the PDC
B (not for Definition AS).
First switch the F2, F3, F5, F6 circuit breakers to the 0 position and then to the
1 position.
2. Switch the system to the SYSTEM/ON status at the control box.
Software
n.a
Tune-up
n.a.
Siemens, 2008 CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Definition / AS / Flash
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
MPT/MPT-2 Mechanical 265
Page 265 of 354
Tests
1. Check the horizontal movement of the top support via the buttons at the gantry control
panels.
2. Perform a test scan
Final Steps 0
1. Clean.
266 MPT/MPT-2 Mechanical
Definition / AS / Flash CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Siemens, 2008
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
Page 266 of 354
Belt pulley PHS_MPT (tabletop) 8.5
The following instructions are applicable to:
Fig. 213: Belt pulley PHS_MPT, part no. 8615861
The list below shows the usage of the Belt pulley PHS_MPT:
NOTE The Belt pulley PHS_MPT (part no. 8615861) does not fit into
patient tables delivered with Belt pulley PHS (part no.
8615853).

Prerequisites 0
Time and manpower
1 person
Estimated total repair time: 1.5 hours
Tools and auxiliary equipment
Standard service tools.
Belt tension meter, part no. 8614203 or 7355642.
Patient table version Serial no. range:
PHS-2, product no. 8616026 from serial no. 1170 onward
PHS-3, product no. 8616034 from serial no. 1602 onward
PHS-4, product no. 8097144 from serial no. 1001 onward
MPT, product no. 8098225 from serial no. 1001 onward
MPT-2, product no. 8097102 from serial no. 1001 onward
Siemens, 2008 CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Definition / AS / Flash
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
MPT/MPT-2 Mechanical 267
Page 267 of 354
Preliminary steps 0
1. Raise the table to a height of 125.
2. Switch the system to COMP/ON on the control box.
3. Switch OFF the gantry/PHS power using the service push-button S1 in the PDC.
Secure the circuit breakers that S1 switched off against unintended switch-on
(e.g. lock and tag).
NOTE Read and observe the safety information in the Prod-
uct-specific safety notes prior to performing service work
on the patient table. If the patient table power is switched off
for service work, always secure it against accidental
switch-on.

4. Remove the switchplate cover (Removing / p. 41).
5. Feed in the table and remove the tabletop covers (Tabletop covers (front and
rear) / p. 29).
6. Remove the front cover of the right side support.
Fig. 214: Right front cover
Removal 0
1. Move the tabletop approximately 50 cm (20 inches) into the gantry.
NOTE Do not slide the tabletop when the belt pulleys are removed.

268 MPT/MPT-2 Mechanical
Definition / AS / Flash CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Siemens, 2008
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
Page 268 of 354
2. Remove the rear belt pulley:
3. Remove the front belt pulley:
Fig. 215: Tabletop belt pulley (rear)
1. Release the belt tension adjustment screw (1).
2. Remove the two fastening screws (2).
3. Lift the belt pulley (3) out of the belt.
Fig. 216: Belt pulley PHS_MPT (front)
1. Remove the belt (1).
2. Release the belt tension adjustment screw (2).
3. Remove the two fastening screws (3).
4. Remove the belt pulley.
Siemens, 2008 CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Definition / AS / Flash
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
MPT/MPT-2 Mechanical 269
Page 269 of 354
Installation 0
1. Prepare the new belt pulleys:
Fig. 217: Preparing the new belt pulley
The position of the alignment screw depends on the installation location
of the belt pulley:
Front belt pulley: Insert the alignment screw into the lower thread
(1).
Rear belt pulley: Insert the alignment screw into the upper thread (2).
The alignment screw should protrude approx. 0.7 to 1.0 mm at the oppo-
site side.
270 MPT/MPT-2 Mechanical
Definition / AS / Flash CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Siemens, 2008
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
Page 270 of 354
2. Install the front belt pulley.
Fig. 218: Belt pulley PHS_MPT (front)
1. Place the new belt pulley.
2. Install the fastening screws:
- Insert the longer screw (1) closer to the PHS rear.
- Insert the shorter screw (2) closer to the PHS front.
3. Position the belt pulley:
- Insert the adjustment screw (3)
- Push the belt pulley to the PHS rear.
- Adjust a distance of 4 mm between the leading edge of the belt pul-
ley and the front of the support frame (4).
4. Install the fastening screws (1, 2) but do not fully tighten them yet.
5. Put the belt (5) onto the front pulley.
Siemens, 2008 CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Definition / AS / Flash
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
MPT/MPT-2 Mechanical 271
Page 271 of 354
3. Install the rear belt pulley.
Adjustment 0
1. Adjust the belt tension:
- Push the tabletop towards the gantry until a distance of 600 mm between the rear
pulley and the belt clamp is achieved.
Fig. 220: Belt tabletop - distance 600 mm
- Place the sensor of the belt tension meter at the center of the trim length over the flat
size of the belt (300 mm) (1/Fig. 221 / p. 272).
The distance between sensor and belt should be about 5 to 20 mm.
Fig. 219: Installing the new belt pulley (rear)
Insert the new pulley into the belt (1).
Install the fastening screws (2) but do not fully tighten them yet.
Turn the adjustment screw (3) until the belt is pre-loaded.
272 MPT/MPT-2 Mechanical
Definition / AS / Flash CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Siemens, 2008
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
Page 272 of 354
- Start belt vibration by hitting it with the head of a screwdriver.
- The resonance frequency must be 52
+ 2
Hz for correct belt tension.
- Adjust the required frequency by turning the setscrew (2/Fig. 221 / p. 272).
2. Adjust the axial belt position:
- Manually move the tabletop in and out and check that the belt is centered properly on
the front and rear pulley (1).
- Turn the alignment screw (2) to adjust the correct (centered) belt position (1).
NOTE After axial adjustment the belt should not constantly touch
the pulley side.
When pushing or pulling the tabletop, a slight shift of the belt
to the left or right side is acceptable.

3. Tighten the fastening screws (3) of the belt pulleys with 11 Nm.
Fig. 221: Belt tension measurement (with new
meter)
Fig. 222: Belt tension measurement (with old
meter)
Fig. 223: Belt centering (front pulley) Fig. 224: Belt centering (rear pulley)
Siemens, 2008 CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Definition / AS / Flash
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
MPT/MPT-2 Mechanical 273
Page 273 of 354
Startup 0
Electrical
1. Switch on circuit breakers F2, F3, F5, F6, F7, and F11 in the PDC A and F2 in the PDC
B (not for Definition AS).
First switch the F2, F3, F5, F6 circuit breakers to the 0 position and then to the
1 position.
2. Switch the system to SYSTEM/ON status on the control box.
Software
n.a.
Tune-up
n.a.
Tests
1. Move the tabletop (in and out) with gantry panel buttons.
2. Perform test scans (Topogram and Spiral).
Final steps 0
1. Install all PHS covers.
2. Clean the PHS.
274 MPT/MPT-2 Mechanical
Definition / AS / Flash CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Siemens, 2008
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
Page 274 of 354
Tabletop Drive Belt 8.6
The following instructions are applicable to:
- PHS tabletop drive belt, part no 86 14 351
Prerequisites 0
Safety
WARNING
[ hz_serdoc_F13G01U12M03 ]
Avoid accident and injury or damage to parts.
Risk of accident and injury!
Read and observe the safety information contained in
the General section of this document and/or the
Product specific safety notes.
Time and Manpower
1 person
Estimated total repair time: 45 min.
Tools and auxiliary equipment
Standard service kit
Loctite 243
Belt tension meter, for material number see the SPC.
Preliminary steps 0
1. Raise the patient table to maximum height (position 125).
2. Switch system to COMP/ON at the control box.
3. Switch OFF the gantry/PHS power using service push-button S1 in the PDC.
Secure the circuit breakers that S1 switched OFF against unintended switch-on
(e.g. lock and tag).
NOTE Read and observe the safety information in the Prod-
uct-specific safety notes prior to performing service work
on the patient table. If the patient table power is switched off
for service work, always secure it against accidental
switch-on.

4. Remove the tabletop plate. (Tabletop plate / p. 238)
5. Remove the front-end cover from the left and right side support.(Front and rear covers
(left/right) / p. 220)
Siemens, 2008 CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Definition / AS / Flash
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
MPT/MPT-2 Mechanical 275
Page 275 of 354
6. Remove the front tabletop cover (6 plastic caps and Allen screws). (Tabletop covers
(front and rear) / p. 209)
7. Remove the left/right rear end covers of the side support (one plastic cap and screw
each side).(Front and rear covers (left/right) / p. 220)
8. Feed the tabletop sled towards the gantry to get full access to the rear tabletop cover.
9. Remove the rear tabletop cover (6 plastic caps and Allen screws). (Tabletop covers
(front and rear) / p. 209)
Removing 0
1. Move tabletop approx. 1.5 meters into the gantry so that the belt securing point is
accessible from underneath.
2. Release and remove the belt adjuster at the foot end of the tabletop.
Fig. 225: MPT: Tabletop belt tension adjuster
Pos. 1 Adjustment screw
Pos. 2 Mounting/Locking screws
Release the belt adjustment screw (item 1).
Remove the 2 mounting screws (item 2) and remove the belt
adjuster.
276 MPT/MPT-2 Mechanical
Definition / AS / Flash CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Siemens, 2008
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
Page 276 of 354
3. Remove the belt connection block from the tabletop sled.
Fig. 226: MPT: Brass assembly (under tabletop sled)
Pos. 1 Access holes (at right tabletop side support)
Pos. 2 Mounting screw of brass assembly
Move the top support all the way toward the foot end of the table to
access the access holes (item 1) at the right side support.
Move the tabletop sled towards the gantry until the first mounting
screw (item 2) of the brass assembly can be seen through the access
holes.
Remove the first mounting screw with an Allen key (size 5).
Move the tabletop sled approx. 7 cm (3 in.) further toward the gantry
to access the second mounting screw.
Remove the second mounting screw.
The brass assembly is now disconnected from the sled and can
be accessed from the top by moving the tabletop sled away.
Siemens, 2008 CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Definition / AS / Flash
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
MPT/MPT-2 Mechanical 277
Page 277 of 354
4. Removing the belt:
Installation 0
1. Push table fully into gantry and feed the end of the belt through the front adjuster.
T 2. Insert the two belt ends into the belt clamp and secure the clamp with the 2 mounting
screws. Tighten screws to 6 Nm.
Ensure that both ends of the belt are fully inserted into the securing clamp.
Fig. 227: MPT: Belt connection assembly (tabletop)
Pos. 1 Mounting screws (tabletop belt)
Pos. 2 Assembly mounting holes (tabletop sled)
Flip over the assembly 180 degrees to access the mounting screws
of the belt clamp.
Remove the 2 mounting screws (item 1).
Remove the belt.
278 MPT/MPT-2 Mechanical
Definition / AS / Flash CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Siemens, 2008
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
Page 278 of 354
3. Flip back the belt connection assembly and mount the brass assembly onto the table-
top sled.
T 4. Form a belt loop over the drive pulley as before and reinstall the belt.
5. Reinstall the belt tension adjuster at the foot end of the table and secure accordingly.
NOTE There is also a belt tension adjuster at the front-end (gantry
side) of the tabletop, which normally does not need to be
touched.
However, if difficulties should be experienced in adjusting
the correct belt tension it can also be used for additional
adjustment.

6. Check the belt tension.
Fig. 228: MPT: Brass assembly (under tabletop sled)
Pos. 1 Access holes (at right tabletop side support)
Pos. 2 Mounting screw of brass assembly
Reposition the tabletop sled to align the mounting holes of the brass
assembly.
Insert the Allen key through the access holes (item 1), install the first
mounting screw (item 2), and tighten carefully.
Move the tabletop sled approx. 7 cm (3 in.) to access the second
mounting point.
Install the second mounting screw (item 2) and tighten carefully.
Siemens, 2008 CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Definition / AS / Flash
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
MPT/MPT-2 Mechanical 279
Page 279 of 354
- Procedure using the belt tension meter
- Push the tabletop plate towards the gantry until you achieve a distance of 600 mm
between the rear pulley and the belt clamp.
- Place the sensor at the center of the trim length over the flat size of the belt (300
mm). The distance between sensor and belt should be about 5 to 20 mm.
To learn how to use the tension meter, see the operating instructions delivered with
the meter.
- Start belt vibration by hitting it with the head of a screwdriver.
- Perform the measurement.
- The resonance frequency must be 58 +2 Hz for correct belt tension.
NOTE The value 58 +2 Hz is only valid for a new belt. For other
cases, e.g. after replacement of the horizontal motor, the ten-
sion has to be adjusted to 52 +2 Hz.

Fig. 229: Belt tabletop - distance 600 mm
Fig. 230: Measuring with the belt tension meter
280 MPT/MPT-2 Mechanical
Definition / AS / Flash CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Siemens, 2008
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
Page 280 of 354
7. Adjust the belt tension using the adjustment screw (item 1).
8. Reinstall all covers.
9. Reinstall the tabletop plate.
Startup 0
Electrical
1. Switch on circuit breakers F2, F3, F5, F6, F7, and F11 in the PDC A and F2 in the PDC
B (not for Definition AS).
First switch the F2, F3, F5, F6 circuit breakers to the 0 position and then to the
1 position.
2. Switch the system to the SYSTEM/ON status at the control box.
Software
n.a
Tune-up
n.a.
Tests
1. Check the horizontal movement of the tabletop via the buttons at the gantry control pan-
els.
2. Perform a test scan
Fig. 231: MPT: Tabletop belt tension adjuster
Pos. 1 Adjustment screw
Pos. 2 Mounting/Locking screws
Tighten clamping screws (Item 2) to 11 Nm.
Siemens, 2008 CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Definition / AS / Flash
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
MPT/MPT-2 Mechanical 281
Page 281 of 354
Final Steps 0
1. Clean.
282 MPT/MPT-2 Mechanical
Definition / AS / Flash CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Siemens, 2008
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
Page 282 of 354
Top Support Drive Belt 8.7
The following instructions are applicable to:
- PHS top support drive belt, material number 86 14 369
Prerequisites 0
Safety
WARNING
[ hz_serdoc_F13G01U12M03 ]
Avoid accident and injury or damage to parts.
Risk of accident and injury!
Read and observe the safety information contained in
the General section of this document and/or the
Product specific safety notes.
Time and Manpower
1 person
Estimated total repair time: 45 min.
Tools and auxiliary equipment
Standard service kit
Belt tension meter, for material number see the SPC.
Preliminary steps 0
1. Raise the patient table to maximum height (position 125).
2. Switch system to COMP/ON at the control box.
3. Switch OFF the gantry/PHS power using service push-button S1 in the PDC.
Secure the circuit breakers that S1 switched OFF against unintended switch-on
(e.g. lock and tag).
NOTE Read and observe the safety information in the Prod-
uct-specific safety notes prior to performing service work
on the patient table. If the patient table power is switched off
for service work, always secure it against accidental
switch-on.

4. Remove the switchplate cover at the foot end of the tabletop. (Switchplate
cover / p. 213)
5. Lower the telescopic covers of the table to the table base. (Telescopic Covers: Lower-
ing & Removing / p. 228)
Siemens, 2008 CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Definition / AS / Flash
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
MPT/MPT-2 Mechanical 283
Page 283 of 354
6. Move the tabletop towards the gantry to get full access to all parts.
Removing 0
1. Removing the belt adjuster bracket.
Fig. 232: MPT: Belt adjuster (top support)
Pos. 1 Locking nut
Pos. 2 Clamping screw
Pos. 3 Adjustment screw
Release the lock nut (item 1).
Release the clamping screw (Item 2) at the adjuster bracket.
Note: Access is realized through a cutout in the metal frame when the
top support is fully retracted (see figure).
Release the belt tension by turning the adjuster screw (item 3) coun-
terclockwise.
Fully remove the clamping screw (item 2)
Fully remove the adjustment screw from the adjuster bracket and
remove the adjuster bracket.
284 MPT/MPT-2 Mechanical
Definition / AS / Flash CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Siemens, 2008
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
Page 284 of 354
2. Removing the belt:
Installation 0
1. Feed the new belt through the motor pulley first.
T 2. Feed the belt through the adjuster bracket and reinstall clamp. Tighten screws to 6 Nm.
3. Reinstall the belt tension adjuster.
4. Checking the belt tension:
Fig. 233: MPT: Belt clamp (top support)
Pos. 1 Belt clamp screws
Remove the 2 screws (Item 1) at the belt clamp and remove the belt
ends.
Remove the belt from the belt adjuster by feeding it out.
Fig. 234: MPT: Belt on motor pulley (top support)
Remove the belt by feeding it out of the motor pulley and the adjuster
bracket.
Siemens, 2008 CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Definition / AS / Flash
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
MPT/MPT-2 Mechanical 285
Page 285 of 354
- Procedure using the belt tension meter
- Pull the top support fully out, away from the gantry. You should achieve a distance
of 435 mm between the rear pulley and the belt clamp.
- The procedure is the same as described in (Installation / p. 100)
Place the sensor at the center of the trim length over the flat size of the belt (see
arrow in the figure below). The distance between sensor and belt should be about 5
to 20 mm.
To learn how to use the tension meter, see the operating instructions delivered with
the meter.
- Start belt vibration by hitting it with the head of a screwdriver.
- Perform the measurement.
- The resonance frequency must be 75 +2 Hz for correct belt tension.
NOTE The value 75 +2 Hz is only valid for a new belt. For other
cases, e.g. after replacement of the horizontal motor, the ten-
sion has to be adjusted to 70 +2 Hz.

Fig. 235: MPT: Belt for top support
Fig. 236: MPT: Measuring position
286 MPT/MPT-2 Mechanical
Definition / AS / Flash CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Siemens, 2008
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
Page 286 of 354
5. Adjusting the belt tension:
6. Reinstall all covers.
Startup 0
Electrical
1. Switch on circuit breakers F2, F3, F5, F6, F7, and F11 in the PDC A and F2 in the PDC
B (not for Definition AS).
First switch the F2, F3, F5, F6 circuit breakers to the 0 position and then to the
1 position.
2. Switch the system to the SYSTEM/ON status at the control box.
Software
n.a
Fig. 237: MPT: Belt adjuster (top support)
Pos. 1 Locking nut
Pos. 2 Clamping screw
Pos. 3 Adjustment screw
Adjust the tension of the belt with the adjustment screw (Item 3) to
required belt deflection.
Tighten the clamping screw (item 2) to 11 Nm.
Tighten the locking nut (Item 1).
Siemens, 2008 CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Definition / AS / Flash
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
MPT/MPT-2 Mechanical 287
Page 287 of 354
Tune-up
n.a.
Tests
1. Check the horizontal movement of the top support via the buttons at the gantry control
panels.
2. Perform a test scan
Final Steps 0
1. Clean.
288 MPT/MPT-2 Mechanical
Definition / AS / Flash CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Siemens, 2008
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
Page 288 of 354
Tabletop Position Wire Sensor B732 8.8
The following instructions are applicable to:
- PHS tabletop position wire sensor, material number 86 14 377
Prerequisites 0
Safety
WARNING
[ hz_serdoc_F13G01U12M03 ]
Avoid accident and injury or damage to parts.
Risk of accident and injury!
Read and observe the safety information contained in
the General section of this document and/or the
Product specific safety notes.
Time and Manpower
1 person
Estimated total repair time: 45 min.
Tools and auxiliary equipment
Standard service kit
Preliminary steps 0
1. Raise the patient table to maximum height (position 125).
2. Switch system to COMP/ON at the control box.
3. Switch OFF the gantry/PHS power using service push-button S1 in the PDC.
Secure the circuit breakers that S1 switched OFF against unintended switch-on
(e.g. lock and tag).
NOTE Read and observe the safety information in the Prod-
uct-specific safety notes prior to performing service work
on the patient table. If the patient table power is switched off
for service work, always secure it against accidental
switch-on.

4. Remove the tabletop plate. (Tabletop plate / p. 238)
5. Remove the front end cover from the left and right side support. (Front and rear covers
(left/right) / p. 220)
6. Remove the front tabletop cover (6 plastic caps and Allen screws). (Tabletop covers
(front and rear) / p. 209)
Siemens, 2008 CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Definition / AS / Flash
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
MPT/MPT-2 Mechanical 289
Page 289 of 354
7. Remove the left/right rear end covers of the side support (1 plastic cap and screw each
side). (Front and rear covers (left/right) / p. 220)
8. Feed the tabletop sled towards the gantry to get full access to the rear tabletop cover.
9. Remove the rear tabletop cover (6 plastic caps and Allen screws). (Tabletop covers
(front and rear) / p. 209)
10. Lower the telescopic covers of the table to the table base. (Telescopic Covers: Lower-
ing & Removing / p. 228)
Removing 0
1. Remove the brass assembly under the tabletop sled:
Fig. 238: MPT: Brass assembly (under tabletop sled)
Pos. 1 Access holes (at right tabletop side support)
Pos. 2 Mounting screw of brass assembly
Move the top support all the way toward the foot end of the table
access the access holes (item 1) at the right side support.
Move the tabletop sled towards the gantry until the first mounting
screw (item 2) of the brass assembly can be seen through the access
holes.
Remove the first mounting screw with an Allen key (size 5).
Move the tabletop sled approx. 7 cm (3 in.) further toward the gantry
to access the second mounting screw.
Remove the second mounting screw.
The brass assembly is now removed from the sled and can be
accessed from the top by moving the sled away.
290 MPT/MPT-2 Mechanical
Definition / AS / Flash CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Siemens, 2008
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
Page 290 of 354
2. Removing and retracting the sensor wire:
3. Removing the sensor:
Fig. 239: MPT: Sensor wire fixation at brass assembly (tabletop sled)
Pos. 1 Brass assembly mounting holes (tabletop sled)
Pos. 2 Sensor wire mounting nut
Pos. 3 Sensor lock nut
Pos. 4 Belt clamp (tabletop belt)
Release the sensor lock nut.
Hold the sensor wire with one hand to prevent sudden retraction and
remove the mounting nut of the sensor wire (item 2).
Remove the sensor wire from the brass block and carefully let it
retract into the sensor housing.
Fig. 240: MPT: Wire sensor (tabletop position)
Pos. 1 Cable connection
Pos. 2 Mounting screws
Pos. 3 Sensor wire (outlet)
Remove the cable connection from the sensor (item 1).
Remove the 3 mounting screws of the sensor (item 2).
Siemens, 2008 CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Definition / AS / Flash
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
MPT/MPT-2 Mechanical 291
Page 291 of 354
Installation 0
NOTE Carefully hold the sensor wire with one hand when installing
it at the brass assembly.
Do not let the sensor wire retract in an uncontrolled manner.
Sudden retraction of the wire into the sensor will destroy the
sensor!

T 1. Install sensor; tighten all 3 screws to 3 Nm.
2. Draw the sensor wire out and mount the end to the brass assembly with the mounting
nut.
3. Secure the sensor wire accordingly with the locking nut.
4. Reinstall the brass assembly to the tabletop sled accordingly (the reverse sequence as
that described under Removing).
5. Reinstall all covers.
6. Reinstall the tabletop plate.
Startup 0
Electrical
1. Switch on circuit breakers F2, F3, F5, F6, F7, and F11 in the PDC A and F2 in the PDC
B (not for Definition AS).
First switch the F2, F3, F5, F6 circuit breakers to the 0 position and then to the
1 position.
2. Switch the system to the SYSTEM/ON status at the control box.
Software
n.a
Tune-up
NOTE The adjustment procedures for parts that require calibration
will be covered by the FRU Replacement procedure under
Local Service > Tune-up.

Select: Local_Service > Tune-up
Select: FRU Replacement
Select: PHS - Encoder
Press <Go> to start the tour.
The Auto_Complete is started and checks which adjustments are required.
Follow the instructions of the Auto_Complete routine.
292 MPT/MPT-2 Mechanical
Definition / AS / Flash CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Siemens, 2008
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
Page 292 of 354
Tests
1. Check the horizontal movement of the tabletop via the buttons at the gantry control pan-
els.
2. Check the horizontal position display at the gantry display and/or control monitor.
3. Perform a test scan
Final Steps 0
1. Clean.
Siemens, 2008 CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Definition / AS / Flash
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
MPT/MPT-2 Mechanical 293
Page 293 of 354
Top Support Position Magnetic Sensor and Band 8.9
The following instructions are applicable to:
- PHS top support position sensor, material number 86 14 385
Prerequisites 0
Safety
WARNING
[ hz_serdoc_F13G01U12M03 ]
Avoid accident and injury or damage to parts.
Risk of accident and injury!
Read and observe the safety information contained in
the General section of this document and/or the
Product specific safety notes.
Time and Manpower
1 person
Estimated total repair time: 1 hour.
Tools and auxiliary equipment
Standard service kit
Feeler gauges e.g., material number 80 38 259
Preliminary steps 0
1. Raise the patient table to maximum height (position 125).
2. Switch system to COMP/ON at the control box.
3. Switch OFF the gantry/PHS power using service push-button S1 in the PDC.
Secure the circuit breakers that S1 switched OFF against unintended switch-on
(e.g. lock and tag).
NOTE Read and observe the safety information in the Prod-
uct-specific safety notes prior to performing service work
on the patient table. If the patient table power is switched off
for service work, always secure it against accidental
switch-on.

4. Remove the tabletop plate. (Tabletop plate / p. 238)
5. Remove the front end cover from the left and right side support. (Front and rear covers
(left/right) / p. 220)
294 MPT/MPT-2 Mechanical
Definition / AS / Flash CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Siemens, 2008
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
Page 294 of 354
6. Remove the front tabletop cover (6 plastic caps and Allen screws). (Tabletop covers
(front and rear) / p. 209)
7. Remove the left/right rear end covers of the side support (one plastic cap and screw
each side). (Front and rear covers (left/right) / p. 220)
8. Feed the tabletop sled towards the gantry to get full access to the rear tabletop cover.
9. Remove the rear tabletop cover (6 plastic caps and Allen screws). (Tabletop covers
(front and rear) / p. 209)
Removing 0
1. Removing the magnetic sensor:
Fig. 241: MPT: Magnetic sensor (top support position)
Pos. 1 Mounting screws
Pos. 2 Cable connection
Pos. 3 Magnetic sensor
Push the top support all the way towards the gantry.
Remove the connector from sensor (Item 2).
Remove 2 mounting nuts (Item 1) and lift off the sensor.
Siemens, 2008 CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Definition / AS / Flash
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
MPT/MPT-2 Mechanical 295
Page 295 of 354
2. Removing the magnetic band:
Installation 0
1. Clean all tape residue from area of band.
2. Apply supplied 2-sided tape to back of new band and secure at correct position on
frame.
T 3. Reinstall band end clamps. Tighten to 3 Nm.
4. Install the sensor. Use feeler gauge to set 0.5 mm clearance to magnetic band. Tighten
the nuts to 6 Nm.
5. Install the plug at the sensor.
6. Reinstall all covers.
7. Reinstall the tabletop plate.
Fig. 242: MPT: Magnetic band (top support position)
Pos. 1 Mounting clamp (foot-end)
Pos. 2 Mounting clamp (gantry-side)
Pos. 3 Magnetic band
Move the top support accordingly to access the clamp at each end.
Remove the clamp from the band (Item 1).
Carefully lift the band using a screwdriver or thin metal lever.
NOTE: The band is secured to the frame with double-sided tape!
296 MPT/MPT-2 Mechanical
Definition / AS / Flash CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Siemens, 2008
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
Page 296 of 354
Startup 0
Mechanical
1. Switch ON circuit breakers F2, F3, F5, F6, F7, and F11 in the PDC.
NOTE First switch the F2, F3, F5, and F6 circuit breakers to the 0
position and then to the 1 position.

2. Switch system to status SYSTEM/ON at the control box.
Software
n.a
Tune-up
Select: Local_Service > Tune-up
Select: FRU Replacement
Select: PHS - Encoder
Press <Go> to start the tour.
The Auto_Complete is started and checks which adjustments are required.
Follow the instructions of the Auto_Complete routine.
Tests
1. Check the horizontal movement of the top support via the buttons at the gantry control
panels.
2. Check the horizontal position display at the gantry display and/or control monitor.
3. Perform a test scan
Final Steps 0
1. Clean.
Siemens, 2008 CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Definition / AS / Flash
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
MPT/MPT-2 Mechanical 297
Page 297 of 354
Vertical position sensor B711 8.10
The following instructions are applicable to:
- PHS vertical sensor, material number 86 14 435
Prerequisites 0
Safety
WARNING
[ hz_serdoc_F13G01U12M03 ]
Avoid accident and injury or damage to parts.
Risk of accident and injury!
Read and observe the safety information contained in
the General section of this document and/or the
Product specific safety notes.
Time and Manpower
1 person
Estimated total repair time: 1 hr.
Tools and auxiliary equipment
Standard service kit
Preliminary steps 0
1. Raise table to maximum vertical position (position 125).
2. Switch system to COMP/ON at the control box.
3. Switch OFF the gantry/PHS power using service push-button S1 in the PDC.
Secure the circuit breakers that S1 switched OFF against unintended switch-on
(e.g. lock and tag).
NOTE Read and observe the safety information in the Prod-
uct-specific safety notes prior to performing service work
on the patient table. If the patient table power is switched off
for service work, always secure it against accidental
switch-on.

4. Raise the telescopic table covers with the adjustable strip (service aid delivered with the
MPT) to gain full access to the vertical drive assembly. (Telescopic Covers: Releasing &
Raising / p. 224)
298 MPT/MPT-2 Mechanical
Definition / AS / Flash CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Siemens, 2008
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
Page 298 of 354
Removing 0
1. Remove the cable connection (U711.X7) at the vertical motor controller.
2. Cut the cable ties along the cable routing from U711.x7 to the sensor.
3. Removing the sensor:
Installation 0
1. Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
The mounting screw should be positioned in the center of the adjusting slot.
Startup 0
Electrical
1. Switch on circuit breakers F2, F3, F5, F6, F7, and F11 in the PDC A and F2 in the PDC
B (not for Definition AS).
First switch the F2, F3, F5, F6 circuit breakers to the 0 position and then to the
1 position.
2. Switch the system to the SYSTEM/ON status at the control box.
Software
n.a.
Fig. 243: MPT: Vertical position sensor B711
Pos. 1 Mounting screw
Pos. 2 Shaft clamp (Allen screw)
Loosen the Allen screw at the shaft clamp (item 2).
Remove mounting screw (item 1).
Pull sensor out from drive.
Siemens, 2008 CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Definition / AS / Flash
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
MPT/MPT-2 Mechanical 299
Page 299 of 354
Tune-up
Select: Local_Service > Tune-up
Select: FRU Replacement
Select: PHS - Encoder
Press <Go> to start the tour.
The Auto_Complete is started and checks which adjustments are required.
Follow the instructions of the Auto_Complete routine.
Tests
1. Check the vertical table movement via the buttons at the gantry control panels and
check the display for the vertical position at the gantry display.
2. Perform a test scan
Final Steps 0
1. Clean.
300 MPT/MPT-2 Mechanical
Definition / AS / Flash CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Siemens, 2008
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
Page 300 of 354
Vertical Microswitches 8.11
The following instructions are applicable to:
- PHS microswitches, material number 86 14 419
Prerequisites 0
Safety
WARNING
[ hz_serdoc_F13G01U12M03 ]
Avoid accident and injury or damage to parts.
Risk of accident and injury!
Read and observe the safety information contained in
the General section of this document and/or the
Product specific safety notes.
Time and Manpower
1 person
Estimated total repair time: 1 hr.
Tools and auxiliary equipment
Standard service kit
Preliminary steps 0
1. Raise table to maximum vertical position (position 125).
2. Switch system to COMP/ON at the control box.
3. Switch OFF the gantry/PHS power using service push-button S1 in the PDC.
Secure the circuit breakers that S1 switched OFF against unintended switch-on
(e.g. lock and tag).
NOTE Read and observe the safety information in the Prod-
uct-specific safety notes prior to performing service work
on the patient table. If the patient table power is switched off
for service work, always secure it against accidental
switch-on.

4. Raise the telescopic table covers with the adjustable strip (service aid delivered with the
MPT) to gain full access to the vertical drive assembly. (Telescopic Covers: Releasing &
Raising / p. 224)
Siemens, 2008 CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Definition / AS / Flash
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
MPT/MPT-2 Mechanical 301
Page 301 of 354
Removing 0
1. Note regarding the safety nut switch:
2. All replaceable switches are mounted by 2 screws.
Release screws and remove the switch.
Fig. 244: MPT: Safety switches at vertical drive
Pos. 1 Safety nut switch
Pos. 2 Machined groove
Pos. 3 Connect safety switch
The safety nut switch (Item 2) monitors the internal safety nut. It is not
a field replaceable unit. Should the nut fail, the machine groove (item
1) will drop into the casing and the switch will operate.
If the machine groove is not visible, the complete vertical drive
assembly should be replaced.
302 MPT/MPT-2 Mechanical
Definition / AS / Flash CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Siemens, 2008
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
Page 302 of 354
Installation 0
1. Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
2. Upper and lower safety limit switches
Fig. 245: MPT: Vertical limit switches
Pos. 1 Upper limit switch
Pos. 2 Lower limit switch
In normal operation when using the gantry controls, the software lim-
its the vertical movement to 10 mm before the mechanical limit; how-
ever, this position is referenced to the floor and can be affected by
shimming. Therefore, the microswitches are adjusted to operate 5
mm before the mechanical limit. Using the service movement
switches will allow the table to raise or lower until the microswitch
operates.
Turn on F7 and raise the table using the Service controls (Service
movement of PHS / p. 21) to a position just before the mechanical
limit.
Do not drive to the mechanical limit.
Turn off F7.
Use a 6 mm hex key in the manual lift screw (Vertical drive / p. 79)
and move the table to the mechanical limit. Measure the table height
from the floor and note it.
Move the table height to a position 5 mm away from the mechanical
limit.
Adjust the microswitch by releasing the adjuster nut (Item 1) and slid-
ing the carrier so that it operates at this point; use the service move-
ment switches to check the final position.
Siemens, 2008 CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Definition / AS / Flash
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
MPT/MPT-2 Mechanical 303
Page 303 of 354
3. Connect the safety switch
Startup 0
Electrical
1. Switch on circuit breakers F2, F3, F5, F6, F7, and F11 in the PDC A and F2 in the PDC
B (not for Definition AS).
First switch the F2, F3, F5, F6 circuit breakers to the 0 position and then to the
1 position.
2. Switch the system to the SYSTEM/ON status at the control box.
Software
n.a
Tune-up
n.a
Fig. 246: MPT: Connect safety switch (vertical drive)
Pos. 1 Mounting screws (switch bracket)
Pos. 2 Switch mounting screws
Pos. 3 Switching lever (on vertical drive)
The connect safety switch is normally activated and will release if the
drive motor lifts due to a blockage.
Adjust the microswitch vertically using the switch screws (Item 1) and
horizontally using the bracket fasteners (Item 2).
The operation can be checked by installing the safety bolts and man-
ually lowering the table using a hex socket and wrench until the motor
lifts. Check that the microswitch releases.
304 MPT/MPT-2 Mechanical
Definition / AS / Flash CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Siemens, 2008
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
Page 304 of 354
Tests
1. Check the vertical table movement via the buttons at the gantry control panels.
2. Perform a test scan
Final Steps 0
1. Clean.
Siemens, 2008 CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Definition / AS / Flash
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
MPT/MPT-2 Electronics 305
Page 305 of 354
9- 9MPT/MPT-2 Electronics
Overview 0
This chapter describes the removal and replacement of the MPT electronic components.
Fig. 247: Overview: MPT electronics, left table base
Pos. 1 Power supplies
Pos. 2 Table master board (LMAS-2 / LMAS-3)
Pos. 3 Vertical controller
Pos. 4 Foot switch assembly
Pos. 5 Fuses and contactors
Electronics components (at left table base)
- Power supplies (Item 1)
- LMAS-2 / LMAS-3 table master board (see [2])
Software version Comment
LMAS-2 software versions below
VA40
installed in MPT and MPT-2
LMAS-3 software versions VA40
and higher (ex-factory)
installed in MPT-2, serial
numbers 1047 and higher
can be installed in every MPT
running VA40
306 MPT/MPT-2 Electronics
Definition / AS / Flash CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Siemens, 2008
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
Page 306 of 354
- Vertical motor controller (Item 3)
- Foot switch assembly (Item 4)
- Contactors, diodes, and fuses (Item 5)
- Brake resistor
Fig. 248: Overview: MPT electronics at tabletop
Pos. 1 PMM box
Pos. 2 Horizontal motor controller (tabletop)
Pos. 3 Horizontal motor controller (top support)
Electronic components (at tabletop)
- Horizontal motor controllers (tabletop and top support)
- PMM box
Siemens, 2008 CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Definition / AS / Flash
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
MPT/MPT-2 Electronics 307
Page 307 of 354
Power Supplies G701 / G702 9.1
The following instructions are applicable to:
- PHS power supplies, material number 86 14 500 (for MPT and MPT-2) and 86 18
113 (for MPT-2)
Prerequisites 0
Safety
WARNING
[ hz_serdoc_F13G01U12M03 ]
Avoid accident and injury or damage to parts.
Risk of accident and injury!
Read and observe the safety information contained in
the General section of this document and/or the
Product specific safety notes.
Time and manpower
1 person
Estimated total repair time: 30 min
Tools and Auxiliary Equipment
Standard service kit
Preliminary steps 0
1. If possible, raise the patient table to maximum height (position 125).
2. Switch system to COMP/ON at the control box.
3. Switch OFF the gantry/PHS power using service push-button S1 in the PDC.
Secure the circuit breakers that S1 switched OFF against unintended switch-on
(e.g. lock and tag).
NOTE Read and observe the safety information in the Prod-
uct-specific safety notes prior to performing service work
on the patient table. If the patient table power is switched off
for service work, always secure it against accidental
switch-on.

4. Raise the telescopic segment covers with the adjustable strip (service aid delivered
with MPT) to gain full access to the electronics assembly. (Telescopic Covers: Lower-
ing & Removing / p. 228)
5. Remove the foot switch assembly at the left table base for better access (3 Allen
screws).
308 MPT/MPT-2 Electronics
Definition / AS / Flash CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Siemens, 2008
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
Page 308 of 354
Removing 0
1. Remove the power supply cover.
2. Remove the power supply.
Fig. 249: Power supply cover
Pos. 1 Power supply cover
Pos. 2 Cover mounting nuts
Pos. 3 Footswitch assembly
Pos. 4 Lower bolt/stand-off
Pos. 5 Lower cable connection
Remove the mounting nuts from the cover (Item 2).
Remove the cover (item 1)
Fig. 250: PHS power supply (upper view)
Pos. 1 Upper cable connection
Pos. 2 Upper mounting bolt/stand-off
Remove the upper and lower bolt/stand-offs (Item 1).
Disconnect the upper and lower cable.
Remove the power supply.
Siemens, 2008 CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Definition / AS / Flash
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
MPT/MPT-2 Electronics 309
Page 309 of 354
Installation 0
1. Position the power supply at the mounting position.
2. Connect the upper and lower cable to the power supply.
3. Secure the power supply with the upper and lower bolt/stand-off.
4. Reinstall the power supply cover and secure with the 2 mounting nuts.
5. Reinstall the foot switch assembly and secure with 3 Allen screws.
6. Lower the telescopic segment covers of the table and secure with the locking screw.
Startup 0
Electrical
1. Switch on circuit breakers F2, F3, F5, F6, F7, and F11 in the PDC A and F2 in the PDC
B (not for Definition AS).
First switch the F2, F3, F5, F6 circuit breakers to the 0 position and then to the
1 position.
2. Switch the system to the SYSTEM/ON status at the control box.
Software
n.a.
Tune-up
n.a.
Tests
1. Check all table movements (horizontal/vertical) via the buttons at the gantry control
panels.
2. Perform a test scan
Final Steps 0
1. Clean.
310 MPT/MPT-2 Electronics
Definition / AS / Flash CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Siemens, 2008
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
Page 310 of 354
Contactor Relays and Diode 9.2
The following instructions are applicable to:
- Relay (K709), material number 86 14 484
- Relay (K711), material number 86 14 476
- Contactor relay (K701), material number 86 14 468
- Rectifier (V702), material number 86 14 492
Prerequisites 0
Safety
WARNING
[ hz_serdoc_F13G01U12M03 ]
Avoid accident and injury or damage to parts.
Risk of accident and injury!
Read and observe the safety information contained in
the General section of this document and/or the
Product specific safety notes.
Time and manpower
1 person
Estimated total repair time: 30 min. per item.
Tools and Auxiliary Equipment
Standard service kit
Preliminary steps 0
1. If possible, raise the patient table to maximum height (position 125).
2. Switch system to COMP/ON at the control box.
3. Switch OFF the gantry/PHS power using service push-button S1 in the PDC.
Secure the circuit breakers that S1 switched OFF against unintended switch-on
(e.g. lock and tag).
NOTE Read and observe the safety information in the Prod-
uct-specific safety notes prior to performing service work
on the patient table. If the patient table power is switched off
for service work, always secure it against accidental
switch-on.

Siemens, 2008 CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Definition / AS / Flash
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
MPT/MPT-2 Electronics 311
Page 311 of 354
4. Raise the telescopic segment covers with the adjustable strip (service aid delivered
with MPT) to gain full access to the electronics assembly. (Telescopic Covers: Releas-
ing & Raising / p. 224)
Removing 0
1. Removing parts
Fig. 251: Location of relays, fuses, and rectifier
Pos. 1 Contactor/safety relay K701
Pos. 2 Fuses F701/F711/F721/F731 (4 x 1AT)
Pos. 3 Relay K711 (vertical brake)
Pos. 4 Rectifier V702
Pos. 5 Mounting rail
Pos. 6 Rail clamp
Pos. 7 Relay K709 (location behind K701)
Remove wires, check that the markings are clear and understand-
able.
Safety relay K701 (Item 1), relay K709 (item 7) and K711 vertical
brake relay (item 3) are all released by removing the rail clamp (item
6) on the respective mounting rail (item 5).
The rectifier (Item 4) is secured by a a single central mounting screw.
312 MPT/MPT-2 Electronics
Definition / AS / Flash CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Siemens, 2008
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
Page 312 of 354
Installation 0
1. Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Startup 0
Mechanical
1. Lower the telescopic segment covers of the table and secure with the locking screw.
2. Switch ON circuit breakers F2, F3, F5, F6, F7, and F11 in the PDC.
NOTE First switch the F2, F3, F5, and F6 circuit breakers to the 0
position and then to the 1 position.

3. Switch system to status SYSTEM/ON at the control box.
Software
n.a.
Tune-up
n.a.
Tests
1. Check all table movements (horizontal/vertical) via the buttons at the gantry control
panels.
2. Perform a test scan
Final Steps 0
1. Clean.
Siemens, 2008 CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Definition / AS / Flash
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
MPT/MPT-2 Electronics 313
Page 313 of 354
Fuses F701 / F711 / F721 / F731 9.3
The following instructions are applicable to:
- Fuses (1AT), material number 86 14 450
Prerequisites 0
Safety
WARNING
[ hz_serdoc_F13G01U12M03 ]
Avoid accident and injury or damage to parts.
Risk of accident and injury!
Read and observe the safety information contained in
the General section of this document and/or the
Product specific safety notes.
Time and manpower
1 person
Estimated total repair time: 20 min.
Tools and Auxiliary Equipment
Standard service kit
Preliminary steps 0
1. If possible, raise the patient table to maximum height (position 125).
2. Switch system to COMP/ON at the control box.
3. Switch OFF the gantry/PHS power using service push-button S1 in the PDC.
Secure the circuit breakers that S1 switched OFF against unintended switch-on
(e.g. lock and tag).
NOTE Read and observe the safety information in the Prod-
uct-specific safety notes prior to performing service work
on the patient table. If the patient table power is switched off
for service work, always secure it against accidental
switch-on.

4. Raise the telescopic segment covers with the adjustable strip (service aid delivered
with MPT) to gain full access to the electronics assembly. (Telescopic Covers: Releas-
ing & Raising / p. 224)
314 MPT/MPT-2 Electronics
Definition / AS / Flash CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Siemens, 2008
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
Page 314 of 354
Removing 0
1. Remove the fuse.
Installation 0
1. Insert the new fuse as shown in the figure and close cover.
The cover will guide the fuse into the contacts.
2. Rotate fuse housing back into its original position.
3. Lower the telescopic segment covers of the table and secure with the locking screw.
Startup 0
Electrical
1. Switch on circuit breakers F2, F3, F5, F6, F7, and F11 in the PDC A and F2 in the PDC
B (not for Definition AS).
First switch the F2, F3, F5, F6 circuit breakers to the 0 position and then to the
1 position.
2. Switch the system to the SYSTEM/ON status at the control box.
Software
n.a.
Fig. 252: Replacing fuses
Rotate the fuse holder 90 degrees by lifting the tab (Item 1).
Pull the lid (Item 2) to open the fuse housing.
The fuse will be pushed out by a small pin to the position shown
in the figure.
Remove fuse.
Siemens, 2008 CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Definition / AS / Flash
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
MPT/MPT-2 Electronics 315
Page 315 of 354
Tune-up
n.a.
Tests
1. Check all table movements (horizontal/vertical) via the buttons at the gantry control
panels
2. Perform a test scan
Final Steps 0
1. Clean.
316 MPT/MPT-2 Electronics
Definition / AS / Flash CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Siemens, 2008
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
Page 316 of 354
Table master board (LMAS-2 and LMAS-3) 9.4
The following instructions are applicable to:
- Table master board (LMAS-2), material number 86 12 413
- Table master board (LMAS-3), material number 106 43 790
NOTE Do not replace LMAS and motor controllers at the same time!
If you are uncertain which component is causing the prob-
lem, finish replacing one part before you replace the next.

Prerequisites 0
Safety
WARNING
[ hz_serdoc_F13G01U12M03 ]
Avoid accident and injury or damage to parts.
Risk of accident and injury!
Read and observe the safety information contained in
the General section of this document and/or the
Product specific safety notes.
Time and manpower
1 person
Estimated total repair time: 1 hr.
Tools and Auxiliary Equipment
Standard service kit
Preliminary steps 0
1. If possible, raise the patient table to maximum height (position 125).
2. Switch system to COMP/ON at the control box.
3. Switch OFF the gantry/PHS power using service push-button S1 in the PDC.
Secure the circuit breakers that S1 switched OFF against unintended switch-on
(e.g. lock and tag).
Siemens, 2008 CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Definition / AS / Flash
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
MPT/MPT-2 Electronics 317
Page 317 of 354
NOTE Read and observe the safety information in the Prod-
uct-specific safety notes prior to performing service work
on the patient table. If the patient table power is switched off
for service work, always secure it against accidental
switch-on.

4. Raise the telescopic segment covers with the adjustable strip (service aid delivered
with MPT) to gain full access to the electronics assembly. (Telescopic Covers: Releas-
ing & Raising / p. 224)
Removing 0
1. Remove the table master board (LMAS-2 or LMAS-3).
NOTE The figure below shows the LMAS-2 board as an example.
The attachment points of the LMAS-3 are identical.

Installation 0
1. Connect all lower cables to the new LMAS assembly.
T 2. Mount the LMAS assembly to the frame with the 2 nuts and tighten to 3 Nm.
3. Reestablish all other cable connections at the LMAS.
4. Lower the telescopic segment covers of the table and secure with the locking screw.
Fig. 253: Table master board (LMAS-2)
Pos. 1 Mounting nut
Remove all upper cable connections from the LMAS-2 or LMAS-3
board.
Remove the 2 mounting nuts securing the LMAS assembly (Item 1).
Lift the LMAS assembly to remove the lower cable connections.
318 MPT/MPT-2 Electronics
Definition / AS / Flash CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Siemens, 2008
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
Page 318 of 354
Startup 0
Electrical
1. Switch on circuit breakers F2, F3, F5, F6, F7, and F11 in the PDC A and F2 in the PDC
B (not for Definition AS).
First switch the F2, F3, F5, F6 circuit breakers to the 0 position and then to the
1 position.
2. Switch the system to the SYSTEM/ON status at the control box.
Software
n.a.
Tune-up
Select: Local_Service > TuneUp
Select: FRU Replace
Select: PHS - LMAS
Press <Go> to start the tour.
The Auto_Complete is started and checks which adjustments are required.
Follow the instructions of the Auto_Complete routine.
Tests
1. Check all table movements (horizontal/vertical) via the buttons at the gantry control
panels
2. Perform a test scan
Final Steps 0
1. Clean.
Siemens, 2008 CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Definition / AS / Flash
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
MPT/MPT-2 Electronics 319
Page 319 of 354
Brake resistor R719 9.5
The following instructions are applicable to:
- Brake resistor R719, material number 86 14 443
Prerequisites 0
Safety
WARNING
[ hz_serdoc_F13G01U12M03 ]
Avoid accident and injury or damage to parts.
Risk of accident and injury!
Read and observe the safety information contained in
the General section of this document and/or the
Product specific safety notes.
Time and manpower
1 person
Estimated total repair time: 30 min.
Tools and Auxiliary Equipment
Standard service kit
Preliminary steps 0
1. If possible, raise the patient table to maximum height (position 125).
2. Switch system to COMP/ON at the control box.
3. Switch OFF the gantry/PHS power using service push-button S1 in the PDC.
Secure the circuit breakers that S1 switched OFF against unintended switch-on
(e.g. lock and tag).
NOTE Read and observe the safety information in the Prod-
uct-specific safety notes prior to performing service work
on the patient table. If the patient table power is switched off
for service work, always secure it against accidental
switch-on.

4. Raise the telescopic segment covers with the adjustable strip (service aid delivered
with MPT) to gain full access to the electronics assembly. (Telescopic Covers: Releas-
ing & Raising / p. 224)
320 MPT/MPT-2 Electronics
Definition / AS / Flash CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Siemens, 2008
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
Page 320 of 354
Removing 0
1. Remove brake resistor.
Installation 0
1. Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
2. Secure the cable routing from the brake resistor to X719 with cable ties.
3. Lower the telescopic segment covers of the table and secure with the locking screw.
Startup 0
Electrical
1. Switch on circuit breakers F2, F3, F5, F6, F7, and F11 in the PDC A and F2 in the PDC
B (not for Definition AS).
First switch the F2, F3, F5, F6 circuit breakers to the 0 position and then to the
1 position.
2. Switch the system to the SYSTEM/ON status at the control box.
Software
n.a.
Fig. 254: Brake resistor R719
Pos. 1 Mounting screws
Cut all cable ties along the cable routing to connector X719.
Disconnect the cable at connector X719
Remove the 2 mounting screws (Item 1) at the brake resistor.
Siemens, 2008 CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Definition / AS / Flash
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
MPT/MPT-2 Electronics 321
Page 321 of 354
Tune-up
n.a.
Tests
1. Check the vertical table movement via the buttons at the gantry control panels.
2. Perform a test scan
Final Steps 0
1. Clean.
322 MPT/MPT-2 Electronics
Definition / AS / Flash CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Siemens, 2008
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
Page 322 of 354
Vertical motor controller U711 9.6
The following instructions are applicable to:
- Vertical motor controller LUST, material number 86 14 518
NOTE Do not replace LMAS and motor controllers at the same time!
If you are uncertain which component is causing the prob-
lem, finish replacing one part before you replace the next.

Prerequisites 0
Safety
WARNING
[ hz_serdoc_F13G01U12M03 ]
Avoid accident and injury or damage to parts.
Risk of accident and injury!
Read and observe the safety information contained in
the General section of this document and/or the
Product specific safety notes.
Time and manpower
1 person
Estimated total repair time: 45 min.
Tools and Auxiliary Equipment
Standard service kit
Preliminary steps 0
1. If possible, raise the patient table to maximum height (position 125).
2. Switch system to COMP/ON at the control box.
3. Switch OFF the gantry/PHS power using service push-button S1 in the PDC.
Secure the circuit breakers that S1 switched OFF against unintended switch-on
(e.g. lock and tag).
NOTE Read and observe the safety information in the Prod-
uct-specific safety notes prior to performing service work
on the patient table. If the patient table power is switched off
for service work, always secure it against accidental
switch-on.

Siemens, 2008 CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Definition / AS / Flash
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
MPT/MPT-2 Electronics 323
Page 323 of 354
4. Raise the telescopic segment covers with the adjustable strip (service aid delivered
with MPT) to gain full access to the electronics assembly. (Telescopic Covers: Releas-
ing & Raising / p. 224)
Removing 0
1. Remove the vertical motor controller.
Installation 0
1. Check the switch S3 on the inverter and set switch to Pos.1.
S3 must be in Pos.1
2. Install the new motor controller and secure with the two mounting screws.
T Tighten screws to 3 Nm.
3. Connect all cables at the motor controller.
4. Reinstall the patient table segment covers.
Startup 0
Electrical
1. Switch on circuit breakers F2, F3, F5, F6, F7, and F11 in the PDC A and F2 in the PDC
B (not for Definition AS).
First switch the F2, F3, F5, F6 circuit breakers to the 0 position and then to the
1 position.
Fig. 255: Vertical motor controller (LUST)
Pos. 1 Mounting screws
Remove all cable connections.
Remove the 2 mounting screws (Item 1).
324 MPT/MPT-2 Electronics
Definition / AS / Flash CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Siemens, 2008
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
Page 324 of 354
2. Switch the system to the SYSTEM/ON status at the control box.
Software
n.a.
Tune-up
Execute the guided tour for FRU replacement:
Select: Local_Service > TuneUp
Select: FRU Replace
Select: PHS - Motor controller hor./vert.
Press <Go> to start the tour.
The Auto_Complete is started and checks which adjustments are required.
Follow the instructions of the Auto_Complete routine.
Tests
1. Check the vertical table movement via the buttons at the gantry control panels.
2. Perform a test scan
Final Steps 0
1. Clean.
Siemens, 2008 CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Definition / AS / Flash
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
MPT/MPT-2 Electronics 325
Page 325 of 354
Horizontal motor controller U731 (Tabletop) / U721 (Top Support)9.7
The following instructions are applicable to:
- Horizontal motor controller, material number 86 14 401
NOTE Do not replace LMAS and motor controllers at the same time!
If you are uncertain which component is causing the prob-
lem, finish replacing one part before you replace the next.

Prerequisites 0
Safety
WARNING
[ hz_serdoc_F13G01U12M03 ]
Avoid accident and injury or damage to parts.
Risk of accident and injury!
Read and observe the safety information contained in
the General section of this document and/or the
Product specific safety notes.
Time and manpower
1 person
Estimated total repair time: 45 min.
Tools and Auxiliary Equipment
Standard service kit
Preliminary steps 0
1. If possible, raise the patient table to maximum height (position 125).
2. Switch system to COMP/ON at the control box.
3. Switch OFF the gantry/PHS power using service push-button S1 in the PDC.
Secure the circuit breakers that S1 switched OFF against unintended switch-on
(e.g. lock and tag).
NOTE Read and observe the safety information in the Prod-
uct-specific safety notes prior to performing service work
on the patient table. If the patient table power is switched off
for service work, always secure it against accidental
switch-on.

326 MPT/MPT-2 Electronics
Definition / AS / Flash CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Siemens, 2008
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
Page 326 of 354
4. Remove the left/right rear end covers of the side support (1 plastic cap and screw each
side). (Front and rear covers (left/right) / p. 220)
5. Move the tabletop plate towards the gantry to get access to the rear tabletop cover.
6. Remove the rear plastic cover underneath the tabletop plate. (Tabletop covers (front
and rear) / p. 209)
7. Remove the switch plate cover at the foot end of the tabletop plate. (Switchplate
cover / p. 213)
Removing 0
1. Remove the motor controller.
Fig. 256: MPT: Horizontal motor controller (tabletop/top support)
Pos. 1 Tabletop controller U731
Pos. 2 Top support controller U721
Pos. 3 Connectors X731/X721 (to motor assembly)
Tabletop controller is at the foot end of the table (item 2), top support
controller is located closer to the gantry (Item 1).
Remove all connectors.
Remove the 2 mounting screws.
Siemens, 2008 CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Definition / AS / Flash
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
MPT/MPT-2 Electronics 327
Page 327 of 354
Installation 0
1. Check the switch S1 on the inverter and set switch as follows:
Table top controller (item 1): S1 must be in Pos.3
Top support controller (item 2): S1 must be in Pos.2
2. Install the mounting screws and connect all cables.
3. Reinstall the tabletop covers.
Startup 0
Electrical
1. Switch on circuit breakers F2, F3, F5, F6, F7, and F11 in the PDC A and F2 in the PDC
B (not for Definition AS).
First switch the F2, F3, F5, F6 circuit breakers to the 0 position and then to the
1 position.
2. Switch the system to the SYSTEM/ON status at the control box.
Software
n.a.
Tune-up
Execute the guided tour for FRU replacement:
Select: Local_Service > TuneUp
Select: FRU Replace
Select: PHS - Motor controller hor./vert.
Press <Go> to start the tour.
The Auto_Complete is started and checks which adjustments are required.
Follow the instructions of the Auto_Complete routine.
Tests
1. Check the horizontal table movement of the tabletop/top support via the buttons at the
gantry control panels
2. Perform a test scan
Final Steps 0
1. Clean.
328 MPT/MPT-2 Electronics
Definition / AS / Flash CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Siemens, 2008
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
Page 328 of 354
Holding solenoid (MPT-2 only) 9.8
The following instructions are applicable to:
- Holding solenoid, material number 86 18 121
Prerequisites 0
Safety
WARNING
[ hz_serdoc_F13G01U12M03 ]
Avoid accident and injury or damage to parts.
Risk of accident and injury!
Read and observe the safety information contained in
the General section of this document and/or the
Product specific safety notes.
Time and manpower
1 person
Estimated total repair time: 45 min.
Tools and auxiliary equipment
Standard service kit
Preliminary steps 0
1. Lower the telescopic covers as described in (Side support (left/right) / p. 217)
2. Switch system to COMP/ON at the control box.
3. Switch OFF the gantry/PHS power using service push-button S1 in the PDC.
Secure the circuit breakers that S1 switched OFF against unintended switch-on
(e.g. lock and tag).
NOTE Read and observe the safety information in the Prod-
uct-specific safety notes prior to performing service work
on the patient table. If the patient table power is switched off
for service work, always secure it against accidental
switch-on.

Siemens, 2008 CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Definition / AS / Flash
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
MPT/MPT-2 Electronics 329
Page 329 of 354
Removal 0
1. Disconnect the wires on the holding solenoid.
Fig. 257: Opening the connection box
Open the plastic cap of the connection box using a small screwdriver.
Fig. 258: Connection of the holding solenoid
Loosen the connection screw for the wires
Remove the cable.
330 MPT/MPT-2 Electronics
Definition / AS / Flash CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Siemens, 2008
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
Page 330 of 354
2. Remove the holding solenoid.
Installation 0
1. Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
2. Reinstall the covers.
Startup 0
Electrical
1. Switch on circuit breakers F2, F3, F5, F6, F7, and F11 in the PDC A and F2 in the PDC
B (not for Definition AS).
First switch the F2, F3, F5, F6 circuit breakers to the 0 position and then to the
1 position.
2. Switch the system to the SYSTEM/ON status at the control box.
Software
n.a.
Tune-up
n.a.
Tests
1. Test the function of the system
Fig. 259: Attachment of the holding solenoid
Open the screw using a 4-mm Allen key.
Remove the holding solenoid.
Siemens, 2008 CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Definition / AS / Flash
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
MPT/MPT-2 Electronics 331
Page 331 of 354
PMM Box 9.9
The following instructions are applicable to:
- PMM Box, material number 86 18 444
NOTE The PMM box is fully integrated in the tabletop handle
assembly.
Therefore the complete assembly must be replaced.

Prerequisites 0
Safety
WARNING
[ hz_serdoc_F13G01U12M03 ]
Avoid accident and injury or damage to parts.
Risk of accident and injury!
Read and observe the safety information contained in
the General section of this document and/or the
Product specific safety notes.
Time and manpower
1 person
Estimated total repair time: 15 min.
Tools and Auxiliary Equipment
Standard service kit
Preliminary steps 0
1. Raise the patient table to height of 125.
2. Shut down the system software (click <SYSTEM> and select <END> in the user main
menu).
3. Click Shutdown System
4. Confirm with Yes in the dialog box displayed.
NOTE Read and observe the safety information in the Prod-
uct-specific safety notes prior to performing service work
on the patient table. If the patient table power is switched off
for service work, always secure it against accidental
switch-on.

332 MPT/MPT-2 Electronics
Definition / AS / Flash CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Siemens, 2008
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
Page 332 of 354
Removing 0
Remove the PMM box.
Fig. 260: PMM assembly
Pos. 1 Tabletop handle (incorporates PMM)
Pos. 2 Mounting screws
Fig. 261: PMM assembly and connection
Pos. 1 Tabletop handle
Pos. 2 Cable connection X1
Pos. 3 PMM module
Pos. 4 External CanOpen terminator X2 (only version <02)
1. Remove plastic caps and release the 4 Allen screws holding the
PMM assembly.
2. Slide out the assembly to the rear by pulling at the tabletop handle.
3. Disconnect connection X1 (item 2).
4. Only for PMMs with revision level lower than 02: Remove external
CanOpen terminator X2 (item 4).
5. Remove the assembly.
Siemens, 2008 CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Definition / AS / Flash
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
MPT/MPT-2 Electronics 333
Page 333 of 354
Installation 0
1. Installation is in reverse order of removal.
NOTE On PMMs with revision level 02 and higher, the CanOpen ter-
minator is installed in the module. Therefore, the external
resistor in plug X2 is no longer required.
Do not install plug X2!

Startup 0
Electrical
1. Press the Sys On key on the control box. The whole system is ready for operation when
the Sys On LED is lit and the operating elements on the control box are backlit.
Software
1. If the system shows a fatal firmware mismatch, the new firmware has to be installed:
Go to Local Service > Control > Firmware to load the current firmware version.
Tune-up
n.a.
Tests
1. Activate the ECG Monitor Demo mode
- Select: Control > Configuration
- Select: Heartview
- Mark checkbox ECG Monitor Demo mode
- Press <Apply>
An ECG pulse must be seen at the gantry display.
2. Deactivate the ECG Monitor Demo mode by deselecting the checkbox in the Heartview
window.
Final Steps 0
1. Clean.
334 Intervention Module (IVM)
Definition / AS / Flash CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Siemens, 2008
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
Page 334 of 354
10- 10Intervention Module (IVM)
Overview 0
This chapter describes the replacement of the following components of the Intervention
Module (IVM).
Intervention Panel (IVP) with accumulator pack
Wireless Interface Gantry (WIG). This item is located in the right gantry stand.
Rechargeable batteries of IVP (4 x AA type)
Fig. 262: Components of Intervention Module (IVM)
Pos. 1 Intervention Panel (IVP)
Pos. 2 Wireless Interface Gantry (WIG)
Pos. 3 IVP battery pack (4 x rechargeable AA type)
NOTE The replacement of cables that belong to the IVM option is
not described in this document. For further installation infor-
mation, refer to the Options - Installation and Startup -
Patient Table/Intervention Options document, print number
CT00-000.841.26.xx.02.
If the USB FOC cable needs replacing, follow the guidelines
for optical cables, e.g. minimum bending radius is 60 mm
(approx. 2.4 ").

Siemens, 2008 CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Definition / AS / Flash
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
Intervention Module (IVM) 335
Page 335 of 354
Intervention Panel (IVP) 10.1
The following instructions are applicable to:
- Intervention Panel, material number 101 61 670 (1/Fig. 262 / p. 334)
Prerequisites 0
Safety
WARNING
[ hz_serdoc_F13G01U12M03 ]
Avoid accident and injury or damage to parts.
Risk of accident and injury!
Read and observe the safety information contained in
the General section of this document and/or the
Product specific safety notes.
Time and manpower
1 person
Estimated total repair time: 30 min
Tools and Auxiliary Equipment
Standard service kit
Torx key (size: TX8)
Preliminary steps 0
1. Switch system to COMP/ON at the control box.
2. Switch OFF the gantry/PHS power using service push-button S1 in the PDC.
Secure the circuit breakers that S1 switched OFF against unintended switch-on
(e.g. lock and tag).
NOTE Read and observe the safety information in the Prod-
uct-specific safety notes prior to performing service work
on the patient table. If the patient table power is switched off
for service work, always secure it against accidental
switch-on.

336 Intervention Module (IVM)
Definition / AS / Flash CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Siemens, 2008
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
Page 336 of 354
Removing 0
1. Remove the IVP:
Fig. 263: IVP (rear)
Pos. 1 Release button
Pos. 2 Cable connector
Pos. 3 Cover
Pos. 4 Rechargeable batteries (4 x AA type)
Pos. 5 Wireless operation switch
Disconnect the cable from the IVP, if connected (Pos. 2)
Note: Normally, the cable is only connected in wired operation.
Disconnect the external power supply from the IVP (if connected).
If IVP is attached to a holder at the PHS or trolley, push the 2 release
buttons at the IVP (pos.1) to remove it.
Siemens, 2008 CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Definition / AS / Flash
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
Intervention Module (IVM) 337
Page 337 of 354
Installation (for wireless operation) 0
1. Install the new rechargeable batteries and set the Wireless switch at the new IVP.
2. Set the Wireless mode
- Set the Wireless switch (pos. 5) to Position ON
3. Reinstall the cover at the IVP (pos. 3)
4. Install the country-specific IVP approval label (2-6/Fig. 266 / p. 339) at the IVP housing
according to Figure: (4/Fig. 265 / p. 338)
Fig. 264: IVP (rear)
Pos. 1 Release button
Pos. 2 Cable connector
Pos. 3 Cover
Pos. 4 Rechargeable batteries (4 x AA type)
Pos. 5 Wireless operation switch
Remove the cover (Pos.3) from the new IVP (5 Torx screws)
Install the 4 batteries (pos.4), which are delivered with the new spare
part, according to the polarity symbols in the battery compartment.
Due to warranty reasons, use only the accumulator pack, which
is delivered with the spare part. Other batteries may change the
warranted standby time or will even damage the IVP.
338 Intervention Module (IVM)
Definition / AS / Flash CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Siemens, 2008
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
Page 338 of 354
NOTE This labelling procedure is only relevant for wireless oper-
ated IVP modules and for the following countries: China,
Singapore, Australia, New Zealand and Japan
A country-specific IVP approval label must be installed at the
IVP housing after replacement.
The labels are delivered with the new IVP.

Fig. 265: IVP labeling
Pos. 1 IVP serial data
Pos. 2 IVP revision
Pos. 3 IVP FCC label
Pos. 4 IVP approval label
Siemens, 2008 CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Definition / AS / Flash
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
Intervention Module (IVM) 339
Page 339 of 354
Fig. 266: IVM approval labels
Pos. 1 WIG approval label
Pos. 2 IVP approval label: Singapore
Pos. 3 IVP approval label: New Zealand
Pos. 4 IVP approval label: Japan
Pos. 5 IVP approval label: Australia
Pos. 6 IVP approval label: China
Installation (for wired operation) 0
Ex-factory, the spare part is already configured for wired operation.
Therefore only the cable connection has to be performed.
Do not insert the accumulator pack.
The power supply for charging the batteries is also not used.
340 Intervention Module (IVM)
Definition / AS / Flash CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Siemens, 2008
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
Page 340 of 354
Startup 0
Electrical
1. Switch on circuit breakers F2, F3, F5, F6, F7, and F11 in the PDC A and F2 in the PDC
B (not for Definition AS).
First switch the F2, F3, F5, F6 circuit breakers to the 0 position and then to the
1 position.
2. Switch the system to the SYSTEM/ON status at the control box.
Software
NOTE After replacement of the IVP, the firmware will be updated
automatically without any interaction necessary.
During the FW update the LED at the Power-ON button will be
permanently RED.

Clearing the charge counter for the batteries
For software versions less than VA30:
Go to Service Software
Select Utilities.
Within Source select Escape to OS
Within Command select NT Command Interpreter
Within Parameters type rsh 192.168.184.4 -l root -n comon -ww 3.0x28.0x2006.4
0
For software VA30 and higher versions:
Select Tune-Up > Expert Mode > IVM > Clear Charge Counter
NOTE For wireless operating Intervention Module ONLY!
After replacement of the component IVP and/or WIG, a
teaching procedure for synchronizing the wireless commu-
nication is necessary.
This teaching procedure must be executed in service
mode.
The IVP and WIG have to be set to wireless mode AND the
cable MUST be connected.

Execute the teaching procedure to synchronize the wireless communication between
the components IVP and WIG.
Make sure for the wireless module the cable is connected and both switches are set to
wireless mode, on WIP and on the IVP. The wireless switch for the IVP is located
behind the rear cover of the IVP, next to the batteries.
Siemens, 2008 CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Definition / AS / Flash
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
Intervention Module (IVM) 341
Page 341 of 354
Charging the batteries (only for wireless operation)
The batteries are partially charged when delivered.
1. Connect IVP to the power supply
2. Switch on the IVP
Led indicates yellow > the batteries are charging
3. After completion of charging procedure, the IVP will be switched off automatically.
This charging procedure must be performed only after the first installa-
tion/replacement of the IVP.
Tune-up
n.a.
Tests
Check the status LED at the power on button of the IVP:
LED must be permanently GREEN.
Fig. 267: Intervention Panel (IVP)
Pos. 1 Power ON button
1. Switch ON the IVP (Pos.1)
2. Log into service mode: Option > Local Service
3. Select: Tune-Up > Expert Mode > IVM
For VA30 and higher versions: Select IVM Teaching
4. Press <GO>
Wait for messages in the status window:
Function Interventional Module Adjustment completed
and
Status OK in the Test window
342 Intervention Module (IVM)
Definition / AS / Flash CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Siemens, 2008
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
Page 342 of 354
Execute the IVP button test under service mode::
- Select: Option > Local Service
- Select: Test tools
- Select: Stat.Controller > GPC
Deselect all functions first.
- Select: Intervention Module Test
Follow the instructions in the status message window
- Press all buttons at the IVP except the Power ON button and the buttons at the joy-
stick mouse.
Wait for the message Intervention Module Test passed
Final Steps 0
1. Attach the IVP to the holder at the PHS or trolley (as applicable).
Siemens, 2008 CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Definition / AS / Flash
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
Intervention Module (IVM) 343
Page 343 of 354
Wireless Interface Gantry (WIG) 10.2
The following instructions are applicable to:
- Wireless Interface Gantry, material number 101 61 671 (2/Fig. 262 / p. 334)
The WIG is located in the right gantry stand.
Prerequisites 0
Safety
WARNING
[ hz_serdoc_F13G01U12M03 ]
Avoid accident and injury or damage to parts.
Risk of accident and injury!
Read and observe the safety information contained in
the General section of this document and/or the
Product specific safety notes.
Time and manpower
1 person
Estimated total repair time: 30 min
Tools and Auxiliary Equipment
Standard service kit
Preliminary steps 0
1. Switch system to COMP/ON at the control box.
2. Switch OFF the gantry/PHS power using service push-button S1 in the PDC.
Secure the circuit breakers that S1 switched OFF against unintended switch-on
(e.g. lock and tag).
NOTE Read and observe the safety information in the Prod-
uct-specific safety notes prior to performing service work
on the patient table. If the patient table power is switched off
for service work, always secure it against accidental
switch-on.

3. Remove the right side cover at the right gantry stand.
4. Remove the front right cover at the right gantry stand.
344 Intervention Module (IVM)
Definition / AS / Flash CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Siemens, 2008
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
Page 344 of 354
Removing 0
1. Remove the WIG:
Fig. 268: Wireless Interface Gantry (WIG)
Pos. 1 Mounting screws (4 x)
Pos. 2 UMAS-WIG cable connection (X1)
Pos. 3 WIG - ICS cable connection (X2, USB port)
Pos. 4 WIG status indicators (LEDs)
Pos. 5 Wireless On/Off switch
Pos. 6 Wireless antenna (X3)
Disconnect the UMAS-WIG cable at X1 (Pos.2).
Disconnect the ICS-WIG cable at X2 (Pos.3)
Remove the 4 mounting screws (Pos.1).
Remove the WIG assembly.
Siemens, 2008 CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Definition / AS / Flash
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
Intervention Module (IVM) 345
Page 345 of 354
Installation 0
1. Install the new WIG.
Fig. 269: Wireless Interface Gantry (WIG)
Pos. 1 Mounting screws (4 x)
Pos. 2 UMAS-WIG cable connection (X1)
Pos. 3 WIG - ICS cable connection (X2, USB port)
Pos. 4 WIG status indicators (LEDs)
Pos. 5 Wireless On/Off switch
Pos. 6 Wireless antenna (X3)
Set the Wireless switch at the new WIG accordingly (item 5):
Position ON for wireless operation
Position OFF for wired operation (= IVP connected to gantry
via cable)
Install the WIG at the right gantry stand with 4 mounting screws (item
1).
Connect the UMAS cable to X1 (item 2).
Connect the USB cable to X2 (item 3).
346 Intervention Module (IVM)
Definition / AS / Flash CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Siemens, 2008
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
Page 346 of 354
Startup 0
Electrical
1. Switch on circuit breakers F2, F3, F5, F6, F7, and F11 in the PDC A and F2 in the PDC
B (not for Definition AS).
First switch the F2, F3, F5, F6 circuit breakers to the 0 position and then to the
1 position.
2. Switch the system to the SYSTEM/ON status at the control box.
Software
Updating the firmware:
Executing the teaching procedure:
NOTE For wireless operating Intervention Module ONLY!
After replacement of the component IVP and/or WIG, a
teaching procedure for synchronizing the wireless com-
munication is necessary.
This teaching procedure must be executed in service
mode.
The IVP and WIP have to be set to wire less mode AND the
cable MUST be connected.

Fig. 270: Firmware check - successful
Log into service mode: Option > Local service
Select: Control > Firmware Update
The firmware check is started and the status of the FW check is dis-
played.
If all firmware versions are OK and Function FW check com-
pleted is displayed, the firmware was loaded successfully.
If firmware version status is not OK, press <GO> to start the
firmware update again.
Siemens, 2008 CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Definition / AS / Flash
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
Intervention Module (IVM) 347
Page 347 of 354
Tune-up
n.a.
Tests
Check the status of the LEDs at the WIG:
LED Run (Yellow) must be ON (a short flash every other second is normal)
LED Power (Green) must be ON
LED Link (Green) must be ON (if RF-Link to IVP exists)
Final Steps 0
1. Reinstall the front right cover at the right gantry stand.
2. Reinstall the cover at the right gantry stand.
3. Clean.
Fig. 271: Intervention Panel (IVP)
Pos. 1 Power ON button
1. Switch ON the IVP (Pos.1)
2. Log into service mode: Option > Local Service
3. Select: Tuneup > Expert Mode > IVM
For VA30 and higher versions: Select IVM Teaching
4. Press <GO>
Wait for messages in the status window:
Function Interventional Module Adjustment completed
and
Status OK in the Test window
348 Intervention Module (IVM)
Definition / AS / Flash CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Siemens, 2008
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
Page 348 of 354
Rechargeable batteries of IVP 10.3
The following instructions are applicable to:
- Rechargeable batteries of IVP, material number 101 61 762 (contains a set of 4 bat-
teries) (3/Fig. 262 / p. 334)
NOTE Due to warranty reasons, use only the accumulator pack
named above. Other batteries may change the warranty time
or will even damage the IVP.

Prerequisites 0
Safety
WARNING
[ hz_serdoc_F13G01U12M03 ]
Avoid accident and injury or damage to parts.
Risk of accident and injury!
Read and observe the safety information contained in
the General section of this document and/or the
Product specific safety notes.
Time and manpower
1 person
Estimated total repair time: 15 min
Tools and Auxiliary Equipment
Standard service kit
Torx key (size: TX8)
Preliminary steps 0
1. Switch system to COMP/ON at the control box.
2. Switch OFF the gantry/PHS power using service push-button S1 in the PDC.
Secure the circuit breakers that S1 switched OFF against unintended switch-on
(e.g. lock and tag).
NOTE Read and observe the safety information in the Prod-
uct-specific safety notes prior to performing service work
on the patient table. If the patient table power is switched off
for service work, always secure it against accidental
switch-on.

Siemens, 2008 CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Definition / AS / Flash
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
Intervention Module (IVM) 349
Page 349 of 354
3. Remove the cover at the rear of the IVP (5 x Torx screws, TX8).
Removing 0
1. Remove the rechargeable batteries from the IVP.
Fig. 272: Intervention Panel (rear): Battery compartment
Pos. 1 Rechargeable batteries (4 x AA type)
Pos. 2 Wireless operation switch
Remove the rear cover of the IVP (5 x Torx screws, TX8)
Remove the 4 batteries.
350 Intervention Module (IVM)
Definition / AS / Flash CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Siemens, 2008
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
Page 350 of 354
Installation 0
1. Install the new rechargeable batteries (4 x AA type).
2. Connect the cable to the IVP (only for wired IVP version).
Startup 0
Electrical
1. Switch on circuit breakers F2, F3, F5, F6, F7, and F11 in the PDC A and F2 in the PDC
B (not for Definition AS).
First switch the F2, F3, F5, F6 circuit breakers to the 0 position and then to the
1 position.
2. Switch the system to the SYSTEM/ON status at the control box.
Fig. 273: IVP (rear)
Pos. 1 Release button
Pos. 2 Cable connector
Pos. 3 Cover
Pos. 4 Rechargeable batteries (4 x AA type)
Pos. 5 Wireless operation switch
Install the 4 batteries according to the polarity symbols in the battery
compartment.
Reinstall the cover at the IVP (5 x TX8 screws).
Siemens, 2008 CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Definition / AS / Flash
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
Intervention Module (IVM) 351
Page 351 of 354
Software
For software versions less than VA30:
Go to Service Software
Select Utilities.
Within Source select Escape to OS
Within Command select NT Command Interpreter
Within Parameters type rsh 192.168.184.4 -l root -n comon -ww 3.0x28.0x2006.4
0
For VA30 and higher versions:
Within the Service Software, select Tune-Up > Expert Mode > IVM > Clear Charge
Counter
NOTE After replacement of the rechargeable batteries, the teach-
ing procedure for synchronizing the wireless communica-
tion is NOT necessary.

Tune-up
n.a.
Tests
Check the status LED at the power ON button of the IVP:
LED must be permanently GREEN.
If LED is flashing YELLOW or flashing RED the batteries must be charged.
Connect the external power supply to the IVP to charge the batteries, if neces-
sary.
Final Steps 0
1. Clean.
352 Changes to Previous Version
Definition / AS / Flash CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Siemens, 2008
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
Page 352 of 354
11- 11Changes to Previous Version
Chapter Change Reason
3 Belt pulley PHS added CR 110471
3 Microswitch replacement updated CR 110336
4
Switch-on procedure after LMAS-2 replace-
ment added
TD_11628
8 Belt pulley PHS_MPT added CR 110471
Siemens, 2008 CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Definition / AS / Flash
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
Index 353
Page 353 of 354

12Index
H hz_serdoc_F13G01U11M01 . . . . . . . . 17
hz_serdoc_F13G01U12M0329, 32, 35, 40, 43, 48, 52, 57, 61, 64, 74, 79, 93, 99, 104,
108, 111, 114, 123, 126, 129, 132, 136, 139, 142, 145, 148, 151, 154, 158, 162, 170,
173, 176, 182, 184, 188, 192, 195, 199, 202, 209, 213, 217, 220, 224, 228, 239, 244,
252, 260, 274, 282, 288, 293, 297, 300, 307, 310, 313, 316, 319, 322, 325, 328, 331,
335, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343, 348
354 Index
Definition / AS / Flash CT00-000.841.03.17.02 Siemens, 2008
08.11 H CX CS SD CR-CT
Page 354 of 354

You might also like